Attachment 2; 12639518R0011

SPECIFICATIONS ISSUED FOR CONSTRUCTION BUILDING AUTOMATION SYSTEM MOORE AIR BASE EDINBURG, TEXAS

December 15, 2017

CEI Project No. 170464 TABLE OF CONTENTS

GENERAL

011000 Summary 012500 Substitution Procedures 012600 Contract Modification Procedures 012900 Payment Procedures 013100 Project Management and Coordination 013200 Construction Progress Documentation 013300 Submittal Procedures 014000 Quality Requirements 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls 016000 Product Requirements 017300 Execution 017700 Closeout Procedures 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data 017839 Project Record Documents 017900 Demonstration and Training

MECHANICAL 230900 Instrumentation and Control Systems

ELECTRICAL 260500 Common Work Results 260519 Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 260533 Raceways and Boxes 260543 Underground Ducts and Raceways 270500 Common Work Results for Communications 271500 Communications Horizontal Cabling

APPENDIX RFI JACE8000 Niagara4 Omni Directional Antenna by Phoenix Contact Pre-configuredCon trolWi reless Control Cabinet by Phoenix Contact RadioAn alogInput Module by Phoenix Contact RadioAn alogOu tputMod uleby Pho enixCon tact RadioCab le40 Foo tby Pho enixCo ntact RadioDig italInput Module by Phoenix Contact RadioSur gePro tectionDe viceby Pho enixCon tact RadioWi reless Transceiver by Phoenix Contact USBProg rammingCab leby Pho enixCon tact YagiAn tennaby Pho enixCon tact

END OF TOC

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS TABLE OF CONTENTS - 1 December 15, 2017 SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Definitions 2. Project information. 3. Work covered by Contract Documents. 4. Phased construction. 5. Work by Government. 6. Work under separate contracts. 7. Future work. 8. Access to site. 9. Coordination with occupants. 10. Work restrictions. 11. Specification and Drawing conventions. 12. Miscellaneous provisions’

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for limitations and procedures governing temporary use of Government's facilities.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. General: Certain terms used in the Construction Documents are defined generally in this Section. Definitions and explanations contained in this Section are not necessarily either complete or exclusive, but are general for the Work to the extent that they may not be stated more explicitly element of the Construction Documents.

B. Award: The acceptance, by the Contracting Officer (CO), of the Contractor’s proposal for a Construction Work Package.

C. BAS: Building Automation System

D. CO: Contracting Officer is the Authority for Federal Government acquisitions. Manages contracts and ensuring the contractors meet the commitment of their contracts. Responsible for all funds, change orders and contract.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 011000 - 1 December 15, 2017 E. COR: Contracting Officer Representative assists the CO in contract management activities and functions, such as responding to RFIs that do not resulting in contract change, review submittals, participate in construction meetings.

F. Furnish: Supply and deliver to the Jobsite, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, and similar operations.

G. Install: Operations at the Jobsite including unloading, temporarily storing, unpacking, assembling, erecting, placing, anchoring, applying, working to dimension, connecting, finishing, curing, protecting, cleaning, and similar operations.

H. Provide: Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.

I. Installer: The Contractor or another entity engaged by the Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-Subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including the installation, erection, application, and similar operations.

J. Experienced: When used with an entity, “experienced” means having successfully completed a minimum of ten previous projects similar in size and scope to this Program or Construction Work Package; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

K. SCADA: Supervisory Control and Data Acquisition a control system architecture that uses computers, networked data communications and graphics user interfaces for high-level process supervisory management, but uses other peripheral devices such as programmable logic controllers and discrete PID controllers to interface to the process plant or machinery.

L. Specifications: That portion of the Contract Documents consisting of the written requirements for materials, equipment, systems, standards and workmanship for the Work. Divisions 00 and 01 of the specifications include requirements for administration and performance of the Work. Divisions 02 through 48 of the specifications include technical requirements for the materials, systems, standards, and workmanship.

M. Factory-Authorized Service Representative: An authorized representative of the manufacturer who is trained and approved by the manufacturer to inspect and approve the installation of manufacturer’s products and that are similar in material, design, and extend to those indicated for this Project and who is authorized by the manufacturer to confirm the issuance of appropriate warranties.

1.4 PROJECT INFORMATION

A. Project Identification: USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 1. Project Location: 22675 N. Moorefield Rd., Moore Air Base, Edinburg, TX 78541

B. Government: USDA APHIS 1. Contracting Officer (CO): Jim Roloff, USDA, APHIS, Procurement Branch, 250 Marquette Ave, Suite 410, Minneapolis, MN 55401. 2. COR and APHIS Facilities Manager: Kirk Richardson, USDA APHIS PPQ CPHST, 22675 Moore Air Base, Bldg. 6407, Edinburg, TX 78541.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 011000 - 2 December 15, 2017 3. APHIS Engineering Project Manager: Keith O’Brien, USDA, APHIS, ASD, ESB, 4700 River Road, Unit 115 (3A-03-43), Riverdale, MD 20737-1238.

C. Design Engineer: Traci Hanegan, Coffman Engineers, Inc., 10 N. Post, Suite 500, Spokane, WA 99201.

1.5 WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

A. The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following: 1. Provide a new building automation system for multiple buildings at Moore Air Base and other Work indicated in the Contract Documents. 2. The system will be sized as expandable to handle additional buildings and systems indicated as future phases in the Contract Documents. 3. See 230900 “Instrumentation and Control Systems” for additional specifics on work covered by Contract Documents.

B. Type of Contract: 1. Project will be constructed under a single Prime Contract. a. Prime Contractor shall be responsible for either performing the duties or subcontracting with the necessary Automation / Control Contractors who will be the single point contact responsible for coordinating and ensuring that the BAS is operational and commissioned. b. Prime contractor and subcontractors shall have permanent company offices located no further than 6-hour vehicle drive from Edinberg, TX.

1.6 PHASED CONSTRUCTION

A. The Work under this Contract shall be conducted in one phase.

1.7 WORK BY GOVERNMENT

A. General: Cooperate fully with Government so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with or delaying work under this Contract or work by Government. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with work performed by Government.

B. Preceding Work: Government will perform the following construction operations at Project site. Those operations are scheduled to be substantially complete before work under this Contract begins. 1. Replacing existing generator with a new generator at the 6414 Building.

C. Subsequent Work: Government will perform the following additional work at site after Substantial Completion. Completion of that work will depend on successful completion of preparatory Work under this Contract. 1. Expand system to include Lift Station. 2. Expand system to include New Waste Water Treatment Plant. 3. Expand system to include Water Reservoir.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 011000 - 3 December 15, 2017 4. Expand system to include New Mexican Fruit Fly Rearing Facility. 5. Expand system to include Building 6420 Traps & Lures. 6. Expand system to include Acid Skid Building. 7. Expand system to include Process Water System.

1.8 FUTURE WORK

A. The Contract Documents include requirements that will allow Government to carry out future work following completion of this Project; provide for the following future work: 1. Provided complete Niagara 4.0 Building Automation System with all necessary software, licenses, hardware as indicated under this Contract for future expansion. 2. Future work will be separately Awarded from this Project in a separate Construction Work Package.

1.9 ACCESS TO SITE

A. General: Contractor shall have limited use of Project site for construction operations as indicated on Drawings by the Contract limits and as indicated by requirements of this Section.

B. Employee Identification: Provide government issued identification (Driver’s License, Passport, or Government Issued Identification Card) and valid proof of vehicle insurance for Contractor personnel working on Project site to access this secure facility. Contractor personnel arriving at the site without appropriate identification and proof of insurance will not be permitted into the facility. Appropriate identification and proof of insurance is required to be presented every time Contractor personnel enter the facility and no exceptions will be granted.

C. Daily Check-in Check-out: Promptly upon arrival to the site, Contractor personnel shall check in at Building 6407 and shall check out before directly leaving the site. On-site work hours to normal business working hours of 7 a.m. to 3:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless arranged permission from APHIS Facilities Manager.

D. Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portions of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated. 1. Limits: Confine construction operations to buildings and equipment being connected during this Phase 1 work to the new BAS system. Parking location will be designated based on the current day’s work activities. 2. Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways, loading areas, and entrances serving premises clear and available to Government, Government's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use these areas for parking or for storage of materials. a. Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations. b. Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials and equipment on-site.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 011000 - 4 December 15, 2017 1.10 BUILDINGS ON SITE WITH LIMITED & SPECIAL ACCESS REQUIREMENTS

A. The Government conducts special projects and experiments which are critical and sensitive. An incident could mean a decade of lost work. Due to the Government’s building use and sensitive nature of projects and/or experiments the Government reserves the right to restrict or limit access. This restriction or limitation could be special entrance requirements, hours of access, personnel training requirements, and clothing. 1. Building 6403 Quarantine has special requirements for entrance into the building. a. APHIS Facilities Manager shall be notified 2 weeks prior to any work being performed in this building. b. All contractors will be required to check in with APHIS Facilities Manager daily prior to work in this building. c. All material, tools, equipment, product will need to be passed through the sterile inspection room via a pass-through from outside. Once material has been inspected and cleaned, it must remain in the building until all the work is complete. d. Contractor to use APHIS ladders, work cart, etc. instead of bringing their own into the building as these have been cleaned.

1.11 COORDINATION WITH OCCUPANTS

A. Full Government Occupancy: Government will occupy site and existing building(s) during entire construction period. Cooperate with Government during construction operations to minimize conflicts and facilitate Government usage. Perform the Work so as not to interfere with Government's day-to-day operations. Maintain existing exits unless otherwise indicated. 1. Maintain access to existing walkways, corridors, and other adjacent occupied or used facilities. Do not close or obstruct walkways, corridors, or other occupied or used facilities without written permission from Government and approval of authorities having jurisdiction. 2. Notify Government not less than 72 hours in advance of activities that will affect Government's operations.

1.12 WORK RESTRICTIONS

A. Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations. 1. Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

B. On-Site Work Hours: Limit work in the existing building to normal business working hours of 7 a.m. to 3:30 p.m., Monday through Friday, unless arranged permission from APHIS Facilities Manager.

C. Existing Utility Interruptions: Do not interrupt utilities serving facilities occupied by Government or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary utility services according to requirements indicated: 1. Notify Government not less than five days in advance of proposed utility interruptions. 2. Obtain Government's written permission before proceeding with utility interruptions.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 011000 - 5 December 15, 2017 D. Noise, Vibration, and Odors: Coordinate operations that may result in high levels of noise and vibration, odors, or other disruption to Government occupancy with Government. 1. Notify Government not less than five days in advance of proposed disruptive operations. 2. Obtain Government's written permission before proceeding with disruptive operations.

E. Restricted Substances: Use of tobacco products and other controlled substances on Project site is not permitted.

1.13 SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS

A. Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and the intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. These conventions are as follows: 1. Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words "shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) is used within a sentence or phrase. 2. Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.

B. Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of all Sections in the Specifications.

C. Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described in detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials and products: 1. Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the individual Specifications Sections. 2. Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S. National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings. 3. Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

1.14 MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

A. The Contractor shall maintain a designated Person-In-Charge at the project site at all times while work is being performed. This Person-In-Charge shall have project management experience for projects of similar size and scope. Submit name of designated Person-In-Charge to Government’s Representative at the start of the project.

B. Observe and comply with all site Heat Index work restrictions. The Heat Index condition is indicated by the color of flag flying at the project site and includes accompanying requirements for work and break times depending on the condition.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 - EXECUTION (NOT USED)

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 011000 - 6 December 15, 2017 END OF SECTION 011000

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 011000 - 7 December 15, 2017

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 011000 - 8 December 15, 2017

SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section specifies administrative and procedural requirements for handling requests for sub- stitutions made after award of the Contract.

B. The Contractor’s Construction Schedule and the Schedule of Submittals are included under Sec- tion “Submittals.”

C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 016000 "Product Requirements" for requirements for submitting comparable product submittals for products by listed manufacturers.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Definitions used in this Article are not intended to change or modify the meaning of other terms used in the Contract Documents.

B. Substitutions: Requests for changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construc- tion required by Contract Documents proposed by the Contactor after award of the Contract are considered requests for “substitutions.” The following are not considered substitutions: 1. Substitutions requested by Bidders during the bidding period, and accepted prior to award of Contract, are considered as included in the Contract Documents and are not subject to re- quirements specified in this Section for substitutions.

2. Revisions to Contract Documents requested by the Government.

3. Specified options of products and construction methods included in Contract Documents.

4. The Contractor’s determination of and compliance with governing regulations and orders is- sued by governing authorities.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Substitution Requests Submittal: Requests for substitution will be considered if received within 15 days after commencement of the Work. Requests received more than 15 days after com- mencement of the Work may be considered or rejected at the discretion of the Government. 1. Submit each request for substitution in accordance with Submittal procedures. 2. Identify the product, or the fabrication or installation method to be replaced in each request. Include related Specification Section and Drawing numbers. Provide complete documenta-

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012500 - 1 December 15, 2017

tion showing compliance with the requirements for substitutions, and the following infor- mation, as appropriate. a. Product Data including Drawings and descriptions of products, fabrication and installa- tion procedures. b. Samples, where applicable or requested. c. List of similar installations for completed projects, with project names and addresses as well as names and addresses of Construction Manager or Engineers and Governments. d. A detailed comparison of significant qualities of the proposed substitution with those of the Work specified. Significant qualities may include elements such as size, weight, du- rability, performance and visual effect. e. Coordination information, including a list of changes or modifications needed to other parts of the Work and to construction performed by the Government and separate Con- tractors, that will become necessary to accommodate the proposed substitution. f. A statement indicating the substitution’s effect on the Contractor’s Construction Schedule compared to the schedule without approval of the substitution. g. Indicate the effect of the proposed substitution on overall Contract Time. h. Cost information, including a proposal of the net change, if any in the Contract Sum. i. Certification by the Contractor that the substitution proposed is equal-to or better in every significant respect to that required by the Contract Documents, and that it will perform adequately in the application indicated. Include the Contractor’s waiver of rights to addi- tional payment or time, that may subsequently become necessary because of the failure of the substitution to perform adequately.

B. Substitution Request Form: Form will be provided by Government upon award of project.

C. Material test reports from a qualified testing agency, indicating and interpreting test results for compliance with requirements indicated.

D. Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitutions with products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specified prod- uct or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, include letter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchase order, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.

E. Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.

F. Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently become neces- sary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.

G. Engineer’s Action: If necessary, Engineer will request additional information or documentation for evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Engineering Project Manager or Design Engineer will notify Contractor of acceptance or rejection of proposed substi- tution within 15 days of receipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

H. Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Engineer’s Supple- mental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012500 - 2 December 15, 2017

I. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a proposed substitution within time allocated.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with related products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended by manufacturers.

1.6 PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved sub- stitutions.

1.7 SUBSTITUTIONS

A. Conditions: The Contractor’s substitution request will be received and considered by the Gov- ernment when one or more of the following conditions are satisfied, as determined by the Gov- ernment; otherwise requests will be returned without action except to record noncompliance with these requirements. Extensive revisions to Contract Documents are not required. 1. Proposed changes are in keeping with the general intent of Contact Documents. 2. The request is timely, fully documented and properly submitted. 3. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time. The request will not be considered if the product or method cannot be provided as a result of failure to pursue the Work promptly or coordinate activities properly. 4. The specified product or method of construction cannot receive necessary approval by a gov- erning authority, and the request substitution can be approved. 5. A substantial advantage is offered the Government in terms of cost, time, energy, conserva- tion or other considerations of merit, after deducting offsetting responsibilities the Govern- ment may be required to bear. 6. The specified product or method of construction cannot be provided in a manner that is com- patible with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the substitution will over- come the incompatibility. 7. The specified product or method of construction cannot be coordinated with other materials, and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution can be coordinated. 8. The specified product or method of construction cannot provide a warranty required by the Contract Documents and where the Contractor certifies that the proposed substitution provide the required warranty. 9. The Contractor’s submittal and Government’s acceptance of Shop Drawings, Product Data or Samples that relate to construction activities not complying with the Contract Documents does not constitute an acceptable or valid request for substitution, nor does it constitute ap- proval.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012500 - 3 December 15, 2017

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 012500

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012500 - 4 December 15, 2017

SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing Con- tract modifications.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for administrative procedures for handling re- quests for substitutions made after the Contract award.

1.3 MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK

A. The Design Engineer, COR, or Engineering Project Manager will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involving adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Con- tract Time.

1.4 PROPOSAL REQUESTS

A. Government-Initiated Proposal Requests: The CO will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work that may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description will include supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

B. Work Change Proposal Requests issued by the CO are not instructions either to stop work in pro- gress or to execute the proposed change.

C. Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and the Contract Time necessary to execute the change.

D. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

E. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

F. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

G. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, in- cluding, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity rela- tionship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

H. Quotation Form: Use form to be provided by Government.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012600 - 1 December 15, 2017

I. Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Con- tract, Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to the CO.

J. Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work. Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed change on the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.

K. Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.

L. Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.

M. Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.

N. Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change, in- cluding, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activity rela- tionship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.

O. Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.

P. Proposal Request Form: Use form to be provided by Government.

1.5 CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES

A. On Government's approval of a Work Change Proposal Request, the CO will issue a Change Or- der for signatures of Government and Contractor. Use form to be provided by Government.

1.6 CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Construction Change Directive: The CO may issue a Construction Change Directive on a Gov- ernment form. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

B. Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

C. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Construction Change Directive.

D. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to sub- stantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

1.7 WORK CHANGE DIRECTIVE

A. Work Change Directive: The CO may issue a Work Change Directive on a Government form. Work Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, for subse- quent inclusion in a Change Order.

B. Work Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012600 - 2 December 15, 2017

C. Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by the Work Change Directive.

D. After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to sub- stantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 012600

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012600 - 3 December 15, 2017

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012600 - 4 December 15, 2017

SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and process Applications for Payment.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures" for administrative procedures for han- dling changes to the Contract. 2. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for administrative requirements governing the preparation and submittal of the Contractor's construction schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum to various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES

A. Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor's construction schedule.

B. Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with items required to be indicated as separate ac- tivities in Contractor's construction schedule.

C. Submit the schedule of values to the CO at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days be- fore the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

D. Sub-schedules for Separate Elements of Work: Where the Contractor's construction schedule de- fines separate elements of the Work, provide subschedules showing values coordinated with each element.

E. Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for the schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

F. Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values: 1. Project name and location. 2. Name of Engineer.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012900 - 1 December 15, 2017

3. Engineer's Project number. 4. Contractor's name and address. 5. Date of submittal.

G. Arrange schedule of values according to Government provided form.

H. Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form, with separate columns to indicate the following for each item listed: 1. Related Specification Section or Division. 2. Description of the Work. 3. Name of subcontractor. 4. Name of manufacturer or fabricator. 5. Name of supplier. 6. Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.

I. Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredth per- cent, adjusted to total 100 percent. Round dollar amounts to whole dollars, with total equal to Contract Sum. 1. Labor. 2. Materials. 3. Equipment.

J. Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of Applications for Payment and progress reports. Provide multiple line items for principal subcon- tract amounts in excess of five percent of the Contract Sum.

K. Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applica- tions for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed.

L. Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site.

M. Allowances: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each allowance. Show line- item value of unit-cost allowances, as a product of the unit cost, multiplied by measured quantity. Use information indicated in the Contract Documents to determine quantities.

N. Purchase Contracts: Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each purchase con- tract. Show line-item value of purchase contract. Indicate Government payments or deposits, if any, and balance to be paid by Contractor.

O. Overhead Costs: Include total cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each line item.

P. Overhead Costs: Show cost of temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actual work-in-place as separate line items.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012900 - 2 December 15, 2017

Q. Closeout Costs. Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for Pro- ject closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percent of the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

R. Schedule of Values Revisions: Revise the schedule of values when Change Orders or Construc- tion Change Directives result in a change in the Contract Sum. Include at least one separate line item for each Change Order and Construction Change Directive.

1.5 APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT

A. Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previous applications and payments as certified by the CO and paid for by Government.

B. Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement between Government and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Applica- tion for Payment is the period indicated in the Agreement.

C. Payment Application Times: Submit Application for Payment to the CO by the 10th of the month. The period covered by each Application for Payment is one month, ending on the last day of the month.

D. Submit draft copy of Application for Payment seven days prior to due date for review by the CO. Draft shall need to be approved by CO prior to inputting into the USDA’s Integrated Acquisition System for payment.

E. Application for Payment Forms: As directed by USDA APHIS CO, use USDA Procurement Sys- tems Division online form on the Integrated Acquisition System for Application for Payment. Government will provide information on system upon award of project for how to input Applica- tion for Payment for processing.

F. No other Application for Payment forms proposed by the Contractor shall be acceptable to CO and Government.

G. Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use updated schedules if revisions were made.

H. Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application for Payment.

I. Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of construction period covered by application.

J. Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Government-requested project accel- eration.

K. Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on- site and items stored off-site.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012900 - 3 December 15, 2017

L. Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Government, and consent of surety to payment for stored materials.

M. Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit on stored materials.

N. Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following: 1. Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previous Applica- tions for Payment. 2. Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application for Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment. 3. Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remaining stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

O. Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction for retainage, on each item.

P. When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.

Q. Government reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.

R. Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.

S. Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Government.

T. Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coin- cide with submittal of first Application for Payment include the following: 1. List of subcontractors. 2. Schedule of values. 3. Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final). 4. Combined Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final) incorporating Work of multiple contracts, with indication of acceptance of schedule by each Contractor. 5. Products list (preliminary if not final). 6. Sustainable design action plans, including preliminary project materials cost data. 7. Schedule of unit prices. 8. Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final). 9. List of Contractor's staff assignments. 10. List of Contractor's principal consultants. 11. Copies of building permits.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012900 - 4 December 15, 2017

12. Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the Work. 13. Initial progress report. 14. Report of preconstruction conference. 15. Certificates of insurance and insurance policies. 16. Performance and payment bonds. 17. Data needed to acquire Government's insurance.

U. Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Engineer issues the Certificate of Sub- stantial Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for por- tion of the Work claimed as substantially complete.

V. Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.

W. This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Gov- ernment occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

X. Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Appli- cation for Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and ac- cepted, including, but not limited, to the following: 1. Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements. 2. Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes, fees, and similar obligations were paid. 3. Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum. 4. Evidence that claims have been settled. 5. Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of Substantial Completion or when Government took possession of and assumed re- sponsibility for corresponding elements of the Work. 6. Final liquidated damages settlement statement.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 012900

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012900 - 5 December 15, 2017

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 012900 - 6 December 15, 2017

SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project in- cluding, but not limited to, the following: 1. General coordination procedures. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. RFIs. 4. Digital project management procedures. 5. Project meetings.

B. Each contractor shall participate in coordination requirements. Certain areas of responsibility are assigned to a specific contractor.

C. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for preparing and submitting Con- tractor's construction schedule. 2. Section 017300 "Execution" for procedures for coordinating general installation and field- engineering services, including establishment of benchmarks and control points. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for coordinating closeout of the Contract.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. BIM: Building Information Modeling.

B. RFI: Request for Information. Request from Government, Engineer, or Contractor seeking infor- mation required by or clarifications of the Contract Documents.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion of the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Include the following information in tabular form:

B. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of entity performing subcontract or supply- ing products.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013100 - 1 December 15, 2017

C. Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.

D. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.

E. Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnel assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identify individuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephone numbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

F. Post copies of list in Building 6407 Facilities in prominent location agreed to by APHIS facilities manager. Submit a copy to the Engineer. Keep list current at all times.

1.5 GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES

A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifica- tions to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, con- nection, and operation.

B. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own in- stallation.

C. Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibil- ity for required maintenance, service, and repair.

D. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

E. Coordination: Each contractor shall cooperate with the Prime Contractor who shall coordinate its construction operations with those of other contractors and entities to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Each contractor shall coordinate its own operations with op- erations included in different Sections that depend on each other for proper installation, connec- tion, and operation.

F. Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its own in- stallation.

G. Coordinate installation of different components with other contractors to ensure maximum per- formance and accessibility for required maintenance, service, and repair.

H. Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.

I. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required for coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.

J. Prepare similar memoranda for Government and separate contractors if coordination of their Work is required.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013100 - 2 December 15, 2017

K. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of required administrative proce- dures with other construction activities and scheduled activities of other contractors and direction of Prime Contractor to avoid conflicts and to ensure orderly progress of the Work. Such adminis- trative activities include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Preparation of Contractor's construction schedule. 2. Preparation of the schedule of values. 3. Installation and removal of temporary facilities and controls. 4. Delivery and processing of submittals. 5. Progress meetings. 6. Pre-installation conferences. 7. Project closeout activities. 8. Startup and adjustment of systems.

1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS

A. Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in in- dividual Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely indicated on Shop Draw- ings, where limited space availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration of products and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.

B. Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and re- solve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include the follow- ing information, as applicable:

C. Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Prepare sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems and components.

D. Coordinate the addition of trade-specific information to coordination drawings by multiple con- tractors in a sequence that best provides for coordination of the information and resolution of con- flicts between installed components before submitting for review.

E. Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of Engineerural, structural, civil, me- chanical, and electrical systems.

F. Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement of compo- nents during the life of the installation.

G. Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves, and other controls.

H. Indicate required installation sequences.

I. Indicate dimensions shown on Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to be in con- flict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Provide alternative sketch- es to Engineer indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minor dimension changes and dif- ficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013100 - 3 December 15, 2017

J. Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:

K. Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show Engineering and structural elements, and mechan- ical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visible ceiling- mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with section draw- ings where required to adequately represent the Work.

L. Plenum Space: Indicate sub-framing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within plenums to accommodate lay- out of light fixtures and other components indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict be- tween light fixtures and other components.

M. Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and ele- vations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.

N. Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.

O. Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floor closers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.

P. Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following: 1. Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation, bracing, flanges, and support systems. 2. Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors, cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment. 3. Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.

Q. Electrical Work: Show the following: 1. Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches (32 mm) in diameter and larger. 2. Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarm loca- tions. 3. Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor-control center locations. 4. Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.

R. Review: Engineer will review coordination drawings to confirm that in general the Work is being coordinated, but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Engineer determines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or de- tail, or are otherwise deficient, Engineer will so inform Contractor, who shall make suitable mod- ifications and resubmit.

S. Coordination Drawing Prints: Prepare coordination drawing prints according to requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

T. Coordination Digital Data Files: Prepare coordination digital data files according to the following requirements:

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013100 - 4 December 15, 2017

1. File Preparation Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as original Drawings. 2. File Preparation Format: Autocad DWG, Version 2016, operating in Microsoft operating system. 3. File Submittal Format: Submit or post coordination drawing files using PDF.

U. Engineer will not be furnishing Contractor any digital data files of Drawings for use in preparing coordination digital data files.

1.7 REQUEST FOR INFORMATION (RFI)

A. General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information, clarification, or inter- pretation of the Contract Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form to be provided by Engineer or Government.

B. Engineer, CO, COR, or Engineering Project Manager will return without response those RFIs submitted by other entities controlled by Contractor.

C. Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work of subcontractors.

D. Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or inter- pretation and the following: 1. Project name. 2. Project number. 3. Date. 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Name of Engineer, Engineering Project Manager, CO or COR. 6. RFI number, numbered sequentially. 7. RFI subject. 8. Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate. 9. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate. 10. Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate. 11. Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI. 12. Contractor's signature. 13. Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needing interpretation. 14. Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affected materi- als, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013100 - 5 December 15, 2017

E. Any such requests that result in adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum must be di- rected to the Contracting Officer (CO).

F. Engineer’s, Engineering Project Manager’s, CO or COR Action: Engineer, Engineering Project Manager, and COR will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow 7 work- ing days for response for each RFI. RFIs received by Engineer, Engineering Project Manager, or COR after 1:00 p.m. will be considered as received the following working day. 1. The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action: a. Requests for approval of submittals. b. Requests for approval of substitutions. c. Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods. d. Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents. e. Requests for interpretation of Engineer's actions on submittals. f. Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs. 2. Engineer's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Engi- neer's time for response will date from time of receipt by Engineer or Engineering Project Manager of additional information. 3. Engineer's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Sec- tion 012600 "Contract Modification Procedures." a. If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum, notify Engineer and Engineering Project Manager in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

G. RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit log weekly by 8:00am Monday with not less than the following: 1. Project name. 2. Name and address of Contractor. 3. Name and address of Engineer and Engineering Project Manager. 4. RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn. 5. RFI description. 6. Date the RFI was submitted. 7. Date Engineer’s, Engineering Project Manager’s, CO or COR’s response was received. 8. Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate. 9. Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as ap- propriate.

H. On receipt of Engineer’s, Engineering Project Manager’s, or COR’s action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affected parties. Review response and notify En- gineer, Engineering Project Manager and COR within 7 days if Contractor disagrees with re- sponse.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013100 - 6 December 15, 2017

1.8 DIGITAL PROJECT MANAGEMENT PROCEDURES

A. Engineer's Data Files Not Available: Engineer will not provide Engineer's CAD drawing digital data files for Contractor's use during construction.

B. PDF Document Preparation: Where PDFs are required to be submitted to Engineering Project Manager or Engineer, prepare as follows: 1. Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal re- quirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navi- gation to each item. 2. Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.

1.9 PROJECT MEETINGS

A. General: Contractor shall schedule and conduct meetings and conferences at Project site. Con- tractor shall provide and coordinate remote internet meeting service for those who cannot attend at Project site. 1. Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is re- quired, of date and time of each meeting. Notify Government and Engineer of scheduled meeting dates and times a minimum of 5 working days prior to meeting. 2. Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Government, Engineering Project Manager, and Engineer, within 3 days of the meeting.

B. Preconstruction Conference: Engineer or Engineering Project Manager will schedule and conduct a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a time convenient to Government and Engineer, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement. The Contractor shall provide and coordinate remote internet meeting service for those who cannot attend at Project site. 1. Attendees: Authorized representatives of Government, Engineering Project Manager, Engi- neer; Contractor and its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other con- cerned parties shall attend the conference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following: a. Responsibilities and personnel assignments. b. Tentative construction schedule. c. Critical work sequencing and long lead items. d. Designation of key personnel and their duties. e. Lines of communications. f. Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders. g. Procedures for RFIs.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013100 - 7 December 15, 2017

h. Procedures for testing and inspecting. i. Procedures for processing Applications for Payment. j. Distribution of the Contract Documents. k. Submittal procedures. l. Sustainable design requirements. m. Preparation of Record Documents. n. Use of the premises o. Work restrictions. p. Working hours. q. Government's occupancy requirements. r. Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls. s. Procedures for moisture and mold control. t. Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns. u. Construction waste management and recycling. v. Parking availability. w. Office, work, and storage areas. x. Equipment deliveries and priorities. y. First aid. z. Security. aa. Progress cleaning. 3. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.

C. Progress Meetings: Contactor will conduct progress meetings at weekly intervals at Project site. Contractor shall provide and coordinate remote internet meeting service for those who cannot at- tend at Project site. 1. Attendees: In addition to representatives of Government, Engineering Project Manager and Engineer, each contractor, subcontractor, supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, or performance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work. 2. Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review oth- er items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appro- priate to status of Project. 3. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determine whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation to Con- tractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will be expe- dited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedule revi- sions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completed within the Contract Time.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013100 - 8 December 15, 2017

a. Review schedule for next period. 4. Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following: a. Interface requirements. b. Sequence of operations. c. Resolution of BIM component conflicts. d. Status of submittals. e. Status of sustainable design documentation. f. Deliveries. g. Off-site fabrication. h. Access. i. Site use. j. Temporary facilities and controls. k. Progress cleaning. l. Quality and work standards. m. Status of correction of deficient items. n. Field observations. o. Status of RFIs. p. Status of Proposal Requests. q. Pending changes. r. Status of Change Orders. s. Pending claims and disputes. t. Documentation of information for payment requests. 5. Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meet- ing minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information. 6. Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meeting where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised schedule con- currently with the report of each meeting.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 013100

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013100 - 9 December 15, 2017

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013100 - 10 December 15, 2017

SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of construction during performance of the Work, including the following: 1. Startup construction schedule. 2. Contractor's Construction Schedule. 3. Construction schedule updating reports. 4. Daily construction reports. 5. Material location reports. 6. Site condition reports. 7. Unusual event reports.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011200 "Multiple Contract Summary" for preparing a combined Contractor's Con- struction Schedule.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, and controlling the construction Project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time and resources.

B. Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start and finish times.

C. Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.

D. Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.

E. Cost Loading: The allocation of the schedule of values for completing an activity as scheduled. The sum of costs for all activities must equal the total Contract Sum.

F. CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project where activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities can be performed and the critical path of Project.

G. Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule that establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013200 - 1 December 15, 2017

H. Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.

I. Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity. 1. Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start of the successor activity. 2. Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting the planned Project completion date.

J. Resource Loading: The allocation of manpower and equipment necessary for completing an ac- tivity as scheduled.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format: 1. PDF file. 2. Four paper copies, of sufficient size to display entire period or schedule, as required.

B. Startup construction schedule. 1. Submittal of cost-loaded, startup construction schedule will not constitute approval of schedule of values for cost-loaded activities.

C. Startup Network Diagram: Of size required to display entire network for entire construction peri- od. Show logic ties for activities.

D. Contractor's Construction Schedule: Initial schedule, of size required to display entire schedule for entire construction period.

E. Submit a working digital copy of schedule, using software indicated, and labeled to comply with requirements for submittals.

F. CPM Reports: Concurrent with CPM schedule, submit each of the following reports. Format for each activity in reports shall contain activity number, activity description, cost and resource load- ing, original duration, remaining duration, early start date, early finish date, late start date, late finish date, and total float in calendar days.

G. Activity Report: List of activities sorted by activity number and then early start date, or actual start date if known.

H. Logic Report: List of preceding and succeeding activities for each activity, sorted in ascending order by activity number and then by early start date, or actual start date if known.

I. Total Float Report: List of activities sorted in ascending order of total float.

J. Earnings Report: Compilation of Contractor's total earnings from Notice to Proceed until most re- cent Application for Payment.

K. Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.

L. Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013200 - 2 December 15, 2017

M. Material Location Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.

N. Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.

O. Unusual Event Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.

P. Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and report- ing, with capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Construction Manager or Engineer's request.

B. Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures relat- ed to the preliminary construction schedule and Contractor's Construction Schedule, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Review software limitations and content and format for reports. 2. Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule. 3. Discuss constraints, including phasing, work stages, area separations, and interim mile- stones. 4. Review delivery dates for Government-furnished products. 5. Review schedule for work of Government's separate contracts. 6. Review submittal requirements and procedures. 7. Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals. 8. Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agen- cies. 9. Review time required for Project closeout and Government startup procedures, including commissioning activities. 10. Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule. 11. Review procedures for updating schedule.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate Contractor's Construction Schedule with the schedule of values, submittal schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

B. Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.

C. Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in proper sequence.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013200 - 3 December 15, 2017

1.7 CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL

A. Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has been developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

B. Activities: Treat each floor or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main ele- ment of the Work. Comply with the following:

C. Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days.

D. Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule. Pro- curement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing, fabri- cation, and delivery.

E. Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's Construc- tion Schedule with submittal schedule.

F. Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.

G. Commissioning Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for commissioning.

H. Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial Com- pletion, and allow time for administrative procedures necessary for certification of Substantial Completion.

I. Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items and final completion.

J. Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as follows in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

K. Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.

L. Products Ordered in Advance: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possible delivery date.

M. Work Restrictions: Show the effect of the following items on the schedule: 1. Coordination with existing construction. 2. Limitations of continued occupancies. 3. Uninterruptible services. 4. Use-of-premises restrictions. 5. Provisions for future construction. 6. Seasonal variations. 7. Environmental control.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013200 - 4 December 15, 2017

N. Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work.

O. Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work. Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated with other construction activities.

P. Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limited to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion.

Q. Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commence prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues: 1. Unresolved issues. 2. Unanswered Requests for Information. 3. Rejected or unreturned submittals. 4. Notations on returned submittals. 5. Pending modifications affecting the Work and the Contract Time.

R. Contractor's Construction Schedule Updating: At designated intervals, update schedule to reflect actual construction progress and activities. Issue schedule 1 week before each regularly scheduled progress meeting. 1. Revise schedule immediately after each meeting or other activity where revisions have been recognized or made. Issue updated schedule concurrently with the report of each such meeting. 2. Include a report with updated schedule that indicates every change, including, but not lim- ited to, changes in logic, durations, actual starts and finishes, and activity durations. 3. As the Work progresses, indicate final completion percentage for each activity.

1.8 STARTUP CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit startup, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type construction schedule within 7 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line. Outline significant construction activities for first 90 days of construction. Include skeleton diagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash require- ment prediction based on indicated activities.

1.9 GANTT-CHART SCHEDULE REQUIREMENTS

A. Gantt-Chart Schedule: Submit a comprehensive, fully developed, horizontal, Gantt-chart-type, Contractor's Construction Schedule within 15 days of date established for the Notice to Proceed.

B. Base schedule on the startup construction schedule and additional information received since the start of Project.

C. Preparation: Indicate each significant construction activity separately. Identify first workday of each week with a continuous vertical line.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013200 - 5 December 15, 2017

D. For construction activities that require three months or longer to complete, indicate an estimated completion percentage in 10 percent increments within time bar.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 013200

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013200 - 6 December 15, 2017

SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Submittal schedule requirements. 2. Administrative and procedural requirements for submittals.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for submitting Applications for Payment and the schedule of values. 2. Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" for submitting coordination draw- ings and subcontract list and for requirements for web-based Project software. 3. Section 013200 "Construction Progress Documentation" for submitting schedules and re- ports, including Contractor's construction schedule. 4. Section 014000 "Quality Requirements" for submitting test and inspection reports, and schedule of tests and inspections. 5. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting closeout submittals and maintenance material submittals. 6. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for submitting operation and mainte- nance manuals. 7. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting record Drawings, record Spec- ifications, and record Product Data. 8. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for submitting video recordings of demon- stration of equipment and training of Owner's personnel.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Engineer, COR or Engineering Project Manager responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as "action submittals."

B. Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not re- quire Engineer, COR or Engineering Project Manager responsive action. Submittals may be re- jected for not complying with requirements. Informational submittals are those submittals indi- cated in individual Specification Sections as "informational submittals."

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013300 - 1 December 15, 2017

1.4 SUBMITTAL SCHEDULE

A. Submittal Schedule: Submit, as an action submittal, a list of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates required by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, and delivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions to submittals noted by Engineer, COR or Engineering Project Manager and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by those corrections.

B. Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's construction schedule.

C. Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals re- quired during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderly progress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture or fabri- cation.

D. Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construc- tion schedule.

E. Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing for submittals.

F. Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format: 1. Scheduled date for first submittal. 2. Specification Section number and title. 3. Submittal Category: Action; informational. 4. Name of subcontractor. 5. Description of the Work covered. 6. Activity or event number.

1.5 SUBMITTAL FORMATS

A. Submittal Information: Include the following information in each submittal: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Engineer. 4. Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 5. Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier. 6. Unique submittal number, including revision identifier. Include Specification Section num- ber with sequential alphanumeric identifier; and alphanumeric suffix for resubmittals. 7. Category and type of submittal. 8. Submittal purpose and description. 9. Number and title of Specification Section, with paragraph number and generic name for each of multiple items. 10. Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013300 - 2 December 15, 2017

11. Indication of full or partial submittal. 12. Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate. 13. Other necessary identification. 14. Remarks. 15. Signature of transmitter.

B. Deviations and Additional Information: On each submittal, clearly indicate deviations from re- quirements in the Contract Documents, including minor variations and limitations; include rele- vant additional information and revisions, other than those requested by Engineer, COR or Engi- neering Project Manager on previous submittals. Indicate by highlighting on each submittal or noting on attached separate sheet.

C. Paper Submittals: 1. Place a permanent label or title block on each submittal item for identification; include name of firm or entity that prepared submittal. 2. Provide a space approximately 6 by 8 inches on label or beside title block to record Con- tractor's review and approval markings and action taken by Engineer, COR or Engineering Project Manager. 3. Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated. Engineer will re- turn two copies. 4. PDF Submittals: Prepare submittals as PDF package, incorporating complete information into each PDF file. Name PDF file with submittal number.

1.6 SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

A. Prepare and submit submittals required by individual Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

B. Email: Prepare submittals as PDF package, and transmit to Engineer, COR or Engineering Project Manager by sending via email. Include PDF transmittal form.

C. Paper: Prepare submittals in paper form, and deliver to Engineer, COR and Engineering Project Manager.

D. Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of construc- tion activities.

E. Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and re- lated activities that require sequential activity.

F. Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.

G. Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section as separate packages under separate transmittals.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013300 - 3 December 15, 2017

H. Coordinate transmittal of submittals for related parts of the Work specified in different Sections so processing will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordina- tion.

I. Engineer, COR or Engineering Project Manager reserves the right to withhold action on a submit- tal requiring coordination with other submittals until related submittals are received.

J. Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time for review shall commence on Engineer, COR or Engineering Project Manager receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will be authorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing, including resubmittals.

K. Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if coor- dination with subsequent submittals is required. Engineer will advise Contractor when a submittal being processed must be delayed for coordination. Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.

L. Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal. 1. Note date and content of previous submittal. 2. Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revi- sion. 3. Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Engineer, COR and Engineering Project Manager action stamp.

M. Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabri- cators, installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of con- struction activities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.

N. Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final action submittals that are marked with approval notation from Engineer, COR or Engineering Project Manager action stamp.

1.7 SUBMITTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type of product or equipment.

B. If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are un- suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.

C. Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.

D. Include the following information, as applicable: 1. Manufacturer's catalog cuts. 2. Manufacturer's product specifications. 3. Standard color charts. 4. Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013300 - 4 December 15, 2017

5. Testing by recognized testing agency. 6. Application of testing agency labels and seals. 7. Notation of coordination requirements. 8. Availability and delivery time information.

E. For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable: 1. Wiring diagrams that show factory-installed wiring. 2. Printed performance curves. 3. Operational range diagrams. 4. Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Draw- ings. 5. Submit Product Data before Shop Drawings, and before or concurrent with Samples.

F. Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. 1. Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following information, as applicable: a. Identification of products. b. Schedules. c. Compliance with specified standards. d. Notation of coordination requirements. e. Notation of dimensions established by field measurement. f. Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated. g. Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified. 2. Paper Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size Drawings, submit Shop Drawings on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.

G. Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicating types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the follow- ing information in tabular form: 1. Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Doc- uments or assigned by Contractor if none is indicated. 2. Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable. 3. Number and name of room or space. 4. Location within room or space.

H. Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm or person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact in- formation of Engineer, COR and Engineering Project Manager, and other information specified.

I. Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information indicating compliance with in- dicated performance and design criteria in individual Specification Sections. Include list of as-

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013300 - 5 December 15, 2017

sumptions and summary of loads. Include load diagrams if applicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Number each page of submittal.

J. Certificates: 1. Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Submit a statement that includes signature of en- tity responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer or other individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity. Provide a notarized signature where indicated. 2. Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that Installer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is au- thorized by manufacturer for this specific Project. 3. Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certify- ing that manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evi- dence of manufacturing experience where required. 4. Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that material complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. 5. Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that product complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.

K. Test and Research Reports: 1. Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation of product. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion. 2. Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed either during installation of product or after product is installed in its final loca- tion, for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 3. Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the Contract Documents. 4. Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on test- ing agency's standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before in- stallation of product, for compliance with performance requirements in the Contract Docu- ments. 5. Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testing agency. 6. Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Pro- ject. Include the following information: a. Name of evaluation organization. b. Date of evaluation. c. Time period when report is in effect.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013300 - 6 December 15, 2017

d. Product and manufacturers' names. e. Description of product. f. Test procedures and results. g. Limitations of use.

1.8 CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW

A. Action Submittals and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordina- tion with other Work of the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note cor- rections and field dimensions. Mark with approval stamp before submitting.

B. Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned for resubmittal without review.

C. Submittals not required by the Contract Documents will be returned by Engineer, COR or Engi- neering Project Manager without action.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 013300

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013300 - 7 December 15, 2017

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 013300 - 8 December 15, 2017

SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.

B. Testing and inspection services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated. These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Con- tract Document requirements.

C. Specific quality-assurance and quality-control requirements for individual work results are speci- fied in their respective Specification Sections. Requirements in individual Sections may also cov- er production of standard products.

D. Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance and quality-control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document require- ments.

E. Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and quality-control services required by Engineer or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.

F. Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.

G. Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" unless otherwise further de- scribed means having successfully completed a minimum of five previous projects similar in na- ture, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar with special requirements indicated; and hav- ing complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

H. Field Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the Work and for completed Work.

I. Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee, Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including in- stallation, erection, application, assembly, and similar operations.

J. Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirements specified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).

K. Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products and materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 014000 - 1 December 15, 2017

L. Product Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed by a nationally recognized testing labora- tory (NRTL) according to 29 CFR 1910.7, by a testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program (NVLAP), or by a testing agency qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish product performance and compliance with specified requirements.

M. Source Quality-Control Tests: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source; for exam- ple, plant, mill, factory, or shop.

N. Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing labora- tory shall mean the same as testing agency.

O. Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during ex- ecution of the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed con- struction will comply with requirements.

P. Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after exe- cution of the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction comply with requirements. Contractor's quality-control services do not include con- tract administration activities performed by Engineer and Construction Manager.

1.3 CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS

A. Conflicting Standards and Other Requirements: If compliance with two or more standards or re- quirements are specified and the standards or requirements establish different or conflicting re- quirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringent requirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for direction before proceeding.

B. Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimum provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the mini- mum quantity or quality specified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements, indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appro- priate, for the context of requirements. Refer uncertainties to Architect for a decision before pro- ceeding.

1.4 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Shop Drawings: 1. Include plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size of mockup construc- tion. 2. Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components. 3. Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.

B. Delegated-Design Services Submittal: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other re- quired submittals, submit a statement signed and sealed by the responsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to be designed or certified by a design professional, indicating that the products and systems are in compliance with performance and design criteria indicated. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 014000 - 2 December 15, 2017

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and re- sponsibilities.

B. Qualification Data: For Contractor's quality-control personnel.

C. Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, sub- mit copy of written statement of responsibility submitted to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on the following systems:

D. Seismic-force-resisting system, designated seismic system, or component listed in the Statement of Special Inspections.

E. Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the Statement of Spe- cial Inspections.

F. Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article to demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a re- cent report on the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.

G. Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following: 1. Specification Section number and title. 2. Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections. 3. Description of test and inspection. 4. Identification of applicable standards. 5. Identification of test and inspection methods. 6. Number of tests and inspections required. 7. Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections. 8. Requirements for obtaining samples. 9. Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.

H. Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports and documents as specified.

I. Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Government's record, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications, inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments, correspondence, records, and similar documents established for compliance with standards and regulations bearing on performance of the Work.

1.6 CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN

A. Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of Notice to Proceed, and not less than 5 days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptable to Ar- chitect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used to carry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor's Construction Schedule.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 014000 - 3 December 15, 2017

B. Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified personnel trained and experienced in managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent to those required for Project.

C. Project quality-control manager may also serve as site project Person-In-Charge. Experience in projects of similar size and scope. Previous government experience.

D. Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through re- view and management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.

E. Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work re- quiring testing or inspection, including the following: 1. Contractor-performed tests and inspections including Subcontractor-performed tests and in- spections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspec- tions. Distinguish source quality-control tests and inspections from field quality-control tests and inspections. 2. Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the State- ment of Special Inspections. 3. Government-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.

F. Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during con- struction to identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicate types of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanship established by Contract requirements and approved mockups.

G. Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of ap- proved and rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate corrective actions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with require- ments. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

1.7 REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS

A. Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sec- tions. Include the following: 1. Date of issue. 2. Project title and number. 3. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of testing agency. 4. Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections. 5. Names of individuals making tests and inspections. 6. Description of the Work and test and inspection method. 7. Identification of product and Specification Section. 8. Complete test or inspection data. 9. Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 014000 - 4 December 15, 2017

10. Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and in- spection. 11. Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract Document requirements. 12. Name and signature of laboratory inspector. 13. Recommendations on retesting and re-inspecting.

B. Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information document- ing manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. In- clude the following: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of technical representative making report. 2. Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product. 3. Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements. 4. Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with require- ments and, if not, what corrective action was taken. 5. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 6. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 7. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

C. Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documenting manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include the following: 1. Name, address, telephone number, and email address of factory-authorized service repre- sentative making report. 2. Statement that equipment complies with requirements. 3. Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies with requirements. 4. Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty. 5. Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels re- quired; individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.

B. Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity to produce required units. As applicable, procure products from manufacturers able to meet qualification requirements, warranty requirements, and technical or factory-authorized service representative requirements.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 014000 - 5 December 15, 2017

C. Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient produc- tion capacity to produce required units.

D. Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, applying, or as- sembling work similar in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.

E. Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice in jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kind indicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly, or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

F. Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performed by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualification requirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

G. Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.

H. Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manu- facturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manu- facturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Pro- ject.

I. Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manu- facturer who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.

1.9 QUALITY CONTROL

A. Government Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Government's re- sponsibility, Government will engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

B. Government will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies engaged and a description of types of testing and inspection they are engaged to per- form.

C. Payment for these services will be made from testing and inspection allowances, as authorized by Change Orders.

D. Costs for retesting and re-inspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor.

E. Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Government are Con- tractor's responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities, whether specified or not, to verify and document that the Work complies with requirements.

F. Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by au- thorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authori- ties having jurisdiction, whether specified or not.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 014000 - 6 December 15, 2017

G. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform quality-control services.

H. Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Government, unless agreed to in writing by Government.

I. Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.

J. Testing and inspection requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are Contractor's responsibility.

K. Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they so direct.

L. Retesting/Re-inspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor's re- sponsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and re-inspecting, for construc- tion that replaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.

M. Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Engineer and Contractor in performance of du- ties. Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

N. Notify Engineer and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during performance of its services.

O. Determine the locations from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are con- ducted.

P. Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviates from requirements.

Q. Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service through Contractor.

R. Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or ac- cept any portion of the Work. Do not perform duties of Contractor.

S. Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representa- tive to inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connec- tions. Report results in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."

T. Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical repre- sentative to observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services in- clude participation in pre-installation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, veri- fication of materials, observation of Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.

U. Associated Contractor Services: Cooperate with agencies and representatives performing required tests, inspections, and similar quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficiently in advance of operations to permit assignment of person- nel. Provide the following:

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 014000 - 7 December 15, 2017

1. Access to the Work. 2. Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections. 3. Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspec- tion. Assist agency in obtaining samples. 4. Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples. 5. Delivery of samples to testing agencies. 6. Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency. 7. Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspection equipment at Project site.

V. Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and quality-control services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replac- ing construction to accommodate testing and inspection.

W. Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 TEST AND INSPECTION LOG

A. Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following: 1. Date test or inspection was conducted. 2. Description of the Work tested or inspected. 3. Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect. 4. Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.

B. Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test and inspection log for Engineer’s reference during normal working hours.

C. Submit log at Project closeout as part of Project Record Documents.

3.2 REPAIR AND PROTECTION

A. General: On completion of testing, inspection, sample taking, and similar services, repair dam- aged construction and restore substrates and finishes.

B. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification Sec- tions or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extend restoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply with the Con- tract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

C. Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 014000 - 8 December 15, 2017

D. Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibil- ity for quality-control services.

END OF SECTION 014000

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 014000 - 9 December 15, 2017

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 014000 - 10 December 15, 2017

SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protec- tion facilities.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for work restrictions and limitations on utility interruptions.

1.3 USE CHARGES

A. General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in the Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated.

B. Water and Sewer Service from Existing System: Water from Owner's existing water system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

C. Electric Power Service from Existing System: Electric power from Owner's existing system is available for use without metering and without payment of use charges. Provide connections and extensions of services as required for construction operations.

1.4 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Site Utilization Plan: Show temporary facilities, temporary utility lines and connections, staging areas, construction site entrances, vehicle circulation, and parking areas for construction person- nel.

B. Implementation and Termination Schedule: Within 15 days of date established for commence- ment of the Work, submit schedule indicating implementation and termination dates of each tem- porary utility.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electric service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.

B. Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each tempo- rary utility before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 015000 - 1 December 15, 2017

1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assume re- sponsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as a construction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsi- bilities.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES

A. Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature con- trols, and foundations adequate for normal loading.

B. Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materials and equipment for construction operations.

C. Store combustible materials apart from building.

2.2 EQUIPMENT

A. Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by loca- tions and classes of fire exposures.

B. HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented, self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

C. Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is prohibited.

D. Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 TEMPORARY FACILITIES, GENERAL

A. Conservation: Coordinate construction and use of temporary facilities with consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilities to minimize waste.

3.2 INSTALLATION, GENERAL

A. Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference with performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

3.3 TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION

A. General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 015000 - 2 December 15, 2017

B. Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupt- ed, if necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

C. Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.

D. Water Service: Connect to Owner's existing water service facilities. Clean and maintain water service facilities in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these fa- cilities to condition existing before initial use.

E. Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of con- struction personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, num- ber, location, operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.

F. Toilets: Use of Owner's existing toilet facilities will be permitted, as long as facilities are cleaned and maintained in a condition acceptable to Owner. At Substantial Completion, restore these fa- cilities to condition existing before initial use.

G. Temporary Heating and Cooling: Provide temporary heating and cooling required by construction activities for curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or high humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements being installed.

H. Isolation of Work Areas in Occupied Facilities: Prevent dust, fumes, and odors from entering oc- cupied areas.

I. Perform daily construction cleanup and final cleanup using approved, HEPA-filter-equipped vac- uum equipment.

J. Electric Power Service: Connect to Owner's existing electric power service. Maintain equipment in a condition acceptable to Owner.

K. Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination for construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

L. Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without operating entire system.

3.4 SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION

A. General: Comply with the following:

B. Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or within 30 feet (9 m) of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply with NFPA 241.

C. Parking: Use designated areas of Owner's existing parking areas for construction personnel.

D. Waste Disposal Facilities: Provide waste-collection containers in sizes adequate to handle waste from construction operations. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Com- ply with progress cleaning requirements in Section 017300 "Execution."

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 015000 - 3 December 15, 2017

3.5 OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL

A. Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limit availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.

B. Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.

C. Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when it has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion. Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been de- layed because of interference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed sur- faces, and replace construction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

D. At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construc- tion period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "Closeout Pro- cedures."

END OF SECTION 015000

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 015000 - 4 December 15, 2017

SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project; product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; special warranties; and comparable products.

1.3 RELATED REQUIREMENTS:

A. Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for requests for substitutions.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," and terms of similar intent.

B. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

C. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

D. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved by Engineer through submittal process to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service perfor- mance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

E. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a single manufacturer's product is named and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or other designation. In addition to the basis-of-design product description, product at- tributes and characteristics may be listed to establish the significant qualities related to type, func- tion, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual charac- teristics, and other special features and requirements for purposes of evaluating comparable prod- ucts of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

F. Subject to Compliance with Requirements: Where the phrase "Subject to compliance with re- quirements" introduces a product selection procedure in an individual Specification Section, pro- vide products qualified under the specified product procedure. In the event that a named product or product by a named manufacturer does not meet the other requirements of the specifications,

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 016000 - 1 December 15, 2017

select another named product or product from another named manufacturer that does meet the re- quirements of the specifications. Submit a comparable product request, if applicable.

1.5 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Comparable Product Request Submittal: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. Identify basis-of-design product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. In- clude Specification Section number and title and Drawing numbers and titles.

B. Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products" Article. 1. Engineer will issue prior approvals in the final addendum. 2. Use product specified if Engineer does not issue a decision on use of a comparable product request within time allocated.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for use on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selected products were also options. 1. Each contractor is responsible for providing products and construction methods compatible with products and construction methods of other contractors. 2. If a dispute arises between contractors over concurrently selectable but incompatible prod- ucts, Engineer will determine which products shall be used.

B. Identification of Products: Except for required labels and operating data, do not attach or imprint manufacturer or product names or trademarks on exposed surfaces of products or equipment that will be exposed to view in occupied spaces or on the exterior.

C. Labels: Locate required product labels and stamps on a concealed surface, or, where required for observation following installation, on a visually accessible surface that is not conspicuous.

D. Equipment Nameplates: Provide a permanent nameplate on each item of service-connected or power-operated equipment. Locate on a visually accessible but inconspicuous surface. Include in- formation essential for operation, including the following: 1. Name of product and manufacturer. a. Model and serial number. b. Capacity. c. Speed. d. Ratings. 2. See individual identification sections in Divisions 21, 22, 23, and 26 for additional identifi- cation requirements.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 016000 - 2 December 15, 2017

1.7 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deteriora- tion, and loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.

B. Delivery and Handling: 1. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowd- ing of construction spaces. 2. Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses. 3. Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for han- dling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing. 4. Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

C. Storage: 1. Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units. 2. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure. 3. Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 4. Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of in- stallation and concealment. 5. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventila- tion, and weather-protection requirements for storage. 6. Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing. 7. Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equip- ment by Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

1.8 PRODUCT WARRANTIES

A. Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other war- ranties required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on prod- uct warranties do not relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Docu- ments.

B. Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.

C. Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights for Owner.

D. Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, ready for execution.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 016000 - 3 December 15, 2017

E. Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly ex- ecuted.

F. Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written document using indicated form properly executed.

G. See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting special warranties.

H. Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."

I. Insert specific requirements if a single warranty must cover work by several contractors. Prepare draft of such warranty with advice of Owner's legal counsel and include it at end of this Section.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, are undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

B. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a complete installation and indicated use and effect.

C. Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situa- tions on other projects.

D. Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties meeting requirements of the Contract Documents.

E. Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Engineer will make selection.

F. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish sa- lient characteristics of products.

G. Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or ap- proved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article to obtain approval for use of an unnamed product. 1. Submit additional documentation required by Engineer in order to establish equivalency of proposed products. Evaluation of "or equal" product status is by the Engineer whose deter- mination is final.

H. Product Selection Procedures: 1. Sole Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. 2. Sole product may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the following: …"

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 016000 - 4 December 15, 2017

3. Sole Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Sole manufacturer/source may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following: …" 4. Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufactur- ers and products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Com- parable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered. a. Limited list of products may be indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: …" 5. Non-Limited List of Products: Where Specifications include a list of names of both availa- ble manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product, which complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of products is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …" 6. Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with require- ments. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be con- sidered. a. Limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: …" 7. Non-Limited List of Manufacturers: Where Specifications include a list of available manu- facturers, provide a product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, which complies with requirements. a. Non-limited list of manufacturers is indicated by the phrase: "Subject to compliance with requirements, available manufacturers whose products may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following: …" 8. Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indi- cated on Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or a comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamed product by one of the other named manufacturers. a. For approval of products by unnamed manufacturers, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for substitutions for convenience.

I. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Engineer's sample," provide a product that complies with requirements and matches Engineer's sample. Engineer's decision will be final on whether a proposed product matches.

J. If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified re- quirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposal of product.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 016000 - 5 December 15, 2017

K. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Engineer from manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with require- ments. Engineer will select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Conditions for Consideration of Comparable Products: Engineer will consider Contractor's re- quest for comparable product when the following conditions are satisfied. If the following condi- tions are not satisfied, Engineer may return requests without action, except to record noncompli- ance with these requirements:

B. Evidence that proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, is con- sistent with the Contract Documents, will produce the indicated results, and is compatible with other portions of the Work. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the Specifications. Significant product qualities include attributes such as type, function, in-service performance and physical properties, weight, dimension, durability, visual characteristics, and other specific features and requirements.

C. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.

D. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names and addresses of Engineers and owners, if requested. Samples, if requested.

E. Submittal Requirements: Approval by the Engineer of Contractor's request for use of comparable product is not intended to satisfy other submittal requirements. Comply with specified submittal requirements.

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 016000

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 016000 - 6 December 15, 2017

SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Section 230900, “Instrumentation and Control Systems” is directly related to work in this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the Work including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Construction layout. 2. Field engineering and surveying. 3. Installation of the Work. 4. Cutting and patching. 5. Coordination of Government-installed products. 6. Progress cleaning. 7. Starting and adjusting. 8. Protection of installed construction.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 011000 "Summary" for limits on use of Project site. 2. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting surveys. 3. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for submitting final property survey with Project Record Documents, recording of Government-accepted deviations from indicated lines and levels, replacing defective work, and final cleaning.

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of sub- sequent work.

B. Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after in- stallation of subsequent work.

1.4 PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS

A. Cutting and Patching Conference: Conduct conference at project site.

B. Prior to commencing work requiring cutting and patching, review extent of cutting and patching anticipated and examine procedures for ensuring satisfactory result from cutting and patching

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017300 - 1 December 15, 2017

work. Require representatives of each entity directly concerned with cutting and patching to at- tend, including the following: 1. Contractor's superintendent. 2. Trade supervisor responsible for cutting operations. 3. Trade supervisor(s) responsible for patching of each type of substrate. 4. Mechanical, electrical, and utilities subcontractors' supervisors, to the extent each trade is affecting by cutting and patching operations.

C. Review areas of potential interference and conflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.

1.5 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cutting and patching will be performed. Include the following information: 1. Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching. 2. Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structur- al elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and other significant visual elements. 3. Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patch- ing work. 4. Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed. 5. Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated and those that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services and systems will be disrupted. 6. Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption of permanent services and systems.

B. Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazard- ous materials, for hazardous waste disposal.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of construction elements.

B. Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Engineer of locations and details of cutting and await directions from Engineer before proceeding. Shore, brace, and support structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elements in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection.

C. Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safety.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017300 - 2 December 15, 2017

D. Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life or safe- ty.

E. Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, in Engi- neer's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction that has been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

F. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's written rec- ommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections. 1. For projects requiring compliance with sustainable design and construction practices and procedures, use products for patching that comply with sustainable design requirements.

B. In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfac- es, use materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible. 1. If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will provide a match acceptable to Engineer for the visual and functional performance of in-place materials.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and construc- tion indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existence and location of underground utilities, and other construction affecting the Work. 1. Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sani- tary sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services; and other utilities. 2. Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving Project site.

B. Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work, examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indi- cated, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance. Record observations. 1. Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections before equipment and fixture installation.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017300 - 3 December 15, 2017

2. Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be installed. 3. Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or primers.

C. Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work is required by other Sections, include the following: 1. Description of the Work. 2. List of detrimental conditions, including substrates. 3. List of unacceptable installation tolerances. 4. Recommended corrections.

D. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with the Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Existing Utility Information: Furnish information to Government that is necessary to adjust, move, or relocate existing utility structures, utility poles, lines, services, or other utility appurte- nances located in or affected by construction. Coordinate with authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. Recheck measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrica- tion. Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatical- ly on Drawings.

D. Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need for clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control of Contractor, submit a request for information to Engineer according to requirements in Sec- tion 013100 "Project Management and Coordination."

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and ele- vation, as indicated. 1. Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level. 2. Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease of removal for replacement. 3. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated. 4. Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in unoccupied spaces.

B. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products in applications indicated.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017300 - 4 December 15, 2017

C. Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. Main- tain conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.

D. Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading in excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.

E. Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items on site and placement in permanent locations.

F. Tools and Equipment: Where possible, select tools or equipment that minimize production of ex- cessive noise levels.

G. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factory prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other portions of the Work to confirm that adequate provisions are made for locating and installing products to comply with indicated re- quirements.

H. Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size and number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with oth- er portions of the Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for load conditions. 1. Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights directed by Engineer. 2. Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction. 3. Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

I. Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, ar- range joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.

J. Repair or remove and replace damaged, defective, or nonconforming Work. 1. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for repairing or removing and replac- ing defective Work.

3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed with cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay. 1. Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

B. Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged during installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existing warranties.

C. Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017300 - 5 December 15, 2017

D. Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. Provide protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cutting and patching operations.

E. Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passage to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to require- ments in Section 011000 "Summary."

F. Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are required to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to prevent interruption to occupied areas.

G. Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations, including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or ad- joining construction. If possible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's written recommendations. 1. In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum dis- turbance of adjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use. 2. Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces. 3. Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond- core drill. 4. Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where re- quired by cutting and patching operations. 5. Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be re- moved. Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent en- trance of moisture or other foreign matter after cutting. 6. Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.

H. Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations following performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practica- ble. Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable. 1. Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate physical integrity of installation. 2. Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing. a. Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials. b. Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.

I. Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into anoth- er, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface of uniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings and replace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017300 - 6 December 15, 2017

1. Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer and inter- mediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coat over entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patch blends with adjacent surfaces.

J. Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface of uniform appearance.

K. Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a weather- tight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

L. Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mor- tar, oils, putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

3.5 GOVERNMENT-INSTALLED PRODUCTS

A. Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Government's construction personnel.

B. Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Gov- ernment's construction personnel. 1. Construction Schedule: Inform Government of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Government's portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. Notify Government if changes to schedule are required due to differ- ences in actual construction progress.

C. Preinstallation Conferences: Include Government's construction personnel at preinstallation con- ferences covering portions of the Work that are to receive Government's work. Attend preinstalla- tion conferences conducted by Government's construction personnel if portions of the Work de- pend on Government's construction.

3.6 PROGRESS CLEANING

A. General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly. Dispose of materials lawfully. 1. Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris. 2. Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F (27 deg C). 3. Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations. 4. Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored. 5. Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are working concurrently.

B. Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.

C. Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for prop- er execution of the Work.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017300 - 7 December 15, 2017

1. Remove liquid spills promptly. 2. Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work area, as appropriate.

D. Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instruc- tions of manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. If specific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to health or property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.

E. Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.

F. Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensure freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

G. Waste Disposal: Do not bury or burn waste materials on-site. Do not wash waste materials down sewers or into waterways.

H. During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materi- als already in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration at Substantial Completion.

I. Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through the remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure opera- bility without damaging effects.

J. Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to ensure that no part of the construction, completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposure during the construction period.

3.7 STARTING AND ADJUSTING

A. Coordinate startup and adjusting of equipment and operating components with requirements in Section 230900 "Instrumentation and Control Systems."

B. Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units, replace with new units, and retest.

C. Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation with- out binding.

D. Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.

E. Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "Quali- ty Requirements."

3.8 PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION

A. Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017300 - 8 December 15, 2017

B. Protection of Existing Items: Provide protection and ensure that existing items to remain undis- turbed by construction are maintained in condition that existed at commencement of the Work.

C. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.

END OF SECTION 017300

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017300 - 9 December 15, 2017

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017300 - 10 December 15, 2017

SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Substantial Completion procedures. 2. Final completion procedures. 3. Warranties. 4. Final cleaning. 5. Repair of the Work.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for additional operation and mainte- nance manual requirements. 2. Section 017839 "Project Record Documents" for submitting Record Drawings, Record Specifications, and Record Product Data. 3. Section 017900 "Demonstration and Training" for requirements to train the Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain products, equipment, and systems.

1.3 ACTION SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: For each type of cleaning agent.

B. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.

C. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at final completion.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.

B. Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.

C. Field Report: For pest control inspection.

1.5 MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS

A. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in other Sections.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017700 - 1 December 15, 2017

1.6 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and cor- rected (Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work is incomplete.

B. Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request.

C. Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancy per- mits, operating certificates, and similar releases.

D. Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record doc- uments, operation and maintenance manuals, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final record information.

E. Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties, work- manship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.

F. Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by Engineer. Label with manufacturer's name and model number.

G. Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenance material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number of related Speci- fication Section. Obtain Engineer’s signature for receipt of submittals. 1. Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing records. 2. Submit sustainable design submittals not previously submitted. 3. Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and mainte- nance.

H. Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior to requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incomplete at time of request. 1. Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements. 2. Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's per- sonnel of changeover in security provisions. 3. Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment. 4. Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion. 5. Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equip- ment, and systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Sec- tion 017900 "Demonstration and Training." 6. Advise Owner of changeover in utility services.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017700 - 2 December 15, 2017

7. Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency re- sponders. 8. Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, con- struction tools, and similar elements. 9. Complete final cleaning requirements. 10. Touch up paint and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.

I. Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a mini- mum of 16 days prior to date the Work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unful- filled requirements. Construction Manager or Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor of items, either on Contractor's list or addi- tional items identified by Construction Manager or Architect, that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued. 1. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is completed or corrected. 2. Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.

1.7 FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES

A. Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion, complete the following: 1. Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Proce- dures." 2. Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Construction Manager or Ar- chitect's Substantial Completion inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Construction Manager or Architect. Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved for acceptance. 3. Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage comply- ing with insurance requirements. 4. Submit pest-control final inspection report. 5. Submit final completion photographic documentation.

B. Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 16 days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On re- ceipt of request, Engineer will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Construction Manager or Architect will prepare a final Certificate for Payment af- ter inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must be completed or corrected before certificate will be issued.

C. Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as incomplete is complet- ed or corrected.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017700 - 3 December 15, 2017

1.8 LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)

A. Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by construc- tion operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed by Contractor that are outside the limits of construction.

B. Organize list of spaces in sequential order.

C. Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, indi- vidual walls, floors, equipment, and building systems. Include the following information at the top of each page: 1. Project name. 2. Date. 3. Name of Engineer 4. Name of Contractor. 5. Page number.

D. Submit list of incomplete items in the following format: 1. PDF electronic file. 2. Two paper copies.

1.9 SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES

A. Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Engineer or Construction Manager for designated portions of the Work where warranties are indicated to commence on dates other than date of Substantial Completion, or when delay in submittal of warranties might limit Own- er's rights under warranty.

B. Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.

C. Warranty Electronic File: Provide warranties and bonds in PDF format. Assemble complete war- ranty and bond submittal package into a single electronic PDF file with bookmarks enabling nav- igation to each item. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document. 1. Submit by email to Engineer.

D. Warranties in Paper Form: 1. Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper. 2. Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or in- stallation, including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017700 - 4 December 15, 2017

3. Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project name, and name of Contractor.

E. Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS

A. Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of the surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property or that might damage finished surfaces. 1. Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

PART 3 – EXECUTION

3.1 FINAL CLEANING

A. General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with local laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.

B. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and mainte- nance program. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions. 1. Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project: a. Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, in- cluding landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other for- eign substances. b. Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site. c. Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free of stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weath- ering of exterior surfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition. d. Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, ple- nums, shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces. e. Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces. f. Remove labels that are not permanent. g. Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Re- move excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances. h. Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017700 - 5 December 15, 2017

3.2 REPAIR OF THE WORK

A. Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of Sub- stantial Completion.

B. Repair, or remove and replace, defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts, refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operating equipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide re- placements. Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction and permanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

C. Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged transparent materials.

D. Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace fin- ishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

E. Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical and electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

END OF SECTION 017700

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017700 - 6 December 15, 2017

SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and mainte- nance manuals, including the following: 1. Operation and maintenance documentation directory manuals. 2. Emergency manuals. 3. Systems and equipment operation manuals. 4. Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. 5. Product maintenance manuals.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for submitting copies of submittals for operation and maintenance manuals. 2. Section 017900 “Demonstration and Training” for delivery of operation and maintenance manuals prior to providing Government’s training. 3. Section 230900 “Instrumentation and Control Systems”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.

B. Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Submit operation and maintenance manuals indicated. Provide content for each manual as speci- fied in individual Specification Sections, and as reviewed and approved at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted and organized as required by this Section. 1. Engineer will comment on whether content of operation and maintenance submittals is ac- ceptable. 2. Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field conditions.

B. Format: Submit operation and maintenance manuals in the following format: 1. Comply with Section 013300 “Submittal Procedures” and Section 230900 “Instrumentation and Control Systems”.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017823 - 1 December 15, 2017

C. Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for Substan- tial Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Engineer, COR or Engineering Project Manager will return copy with comments. 1. Correct or revise each manual to comply with Engineer, COR or Engineering Project Man- ager comments. Submit copies of each corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of com- ments and prior to commencing demonstration and training. 2. Submit to comply with Section 013300 “Submittal Procedures” and Section 230900 “In- strumentation and Control Systems”.

D. Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation and maintenance documentation.

1.5 FORMAT OF OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file for each manual type required. 1. Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size. 2. File Names and Bookmarks: Bookmark individual documents based on file names. Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manual directory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into indi- vidual composite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting book- marks reflect the system, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronic manual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

B. Manuals, Paper Copy: Submit manuals in the form of hard-copy, bound and labeled volumes. 1. Binders: Heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, binders, in thickness necessary to accom- modate contents, sized to hold 8-1/2-by-11-inch (215-by-280-mm) paper; with clear plastic sleeve on spine to hold label describing contents and with pockets inside covers to hold folded oversize sheets. a. If two or more binders are necessary to accommodate data of a system, organize data in each binder into groupings by subsystem and related components. Cross-reference other binders if necessary to provide essential information for proper operation or maintenance of equipment or system. b. Identify each binder on front and spine, with printed title "OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL," Project title or name and subject matter of contents. Indicate volume number for multiple-volume sets. 2. Dividers: Heavy-paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each section of the manual. Mark each tab to indicate contents. Include typed list of products and major components of equipment included in the section on each divider, cross-referenced to Specification Sec- tion number and title of Project Manual.

C. Protective Plastic Sleeves: Transparent plastic sleeves designed to enclose diagnostic software storage media for computerized electronic equipment. Enclose title pages and directories in clear plastic sleeves. 1. Supplementary Text: Prepared on 8-1/2-by-11-inch white bond paper.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017823 - 2 December 15, 2017

2. Drawings: Attach reinforced, punched binder tabs on drawings and bind with text. a. If oversize drawings are necessary, fold drawings to same size as text pages and use as foldouts. b. If drawings are too large to be used as foldouts, fold and place drawings in labeled envelopes and bind envelopes in rear of manual. At appropriate locations in manual, insert typewritten pages indicating drawing titles, descriptions of contents, and draw- ing locations.

1.6 REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Organization of Manuals: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate sec- tion for each system and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manual shall contain the following materials, in the order listed: 1. Title page. 2. Table of contents. 3. Manual contents.

B. Title Page: Include the following information: 1. Subject matter included in manual. 2. Name and address of Project. 3. Name and address of Owner. 4. Date of submittal. 5. Name and contact information for Contractor. 6. Name and contact information for Construction Manager. 7. Name and contact information for CO 8. Name and contact information for COR. 9. Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.

C. Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to the content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manu- al. 1. If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data, include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

D. Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by sys- tem, subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, and components of one system into a single binder.

E. Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identify each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Con- tract Documents. If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operating and Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017823 - 3 December 15, 2017

1.7 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY MANUAL

A. Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides an organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. List items and their loca- tion to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include the following: 1. List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to opera- tion and maintenance manuals that contain information about each system. 2. List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces of equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list. 3. Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and mainte- nance manual.

1.8 EMERGENCY MANUALS

A. Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use by emergency personnel and by Government's operating personnel for types of emergen- cies indicated.

B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following: 1. Type of emergency. 2. Emergency instructions. 3. Emergency procedures.

C. Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include in- structions and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component: 1. Fire. 2. Flood. 3. Gas leak. 4. Water leak. 5. Power failure. 6. Water outage. 7. System, subsystem, or equipment failure. 8. Chemical release or spill.

D. Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similar codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Government's operating personnel for notifi- cation of Installer, supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.

E. Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Instructions on stopping. 2. Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency. 3. Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits. 4. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017823 - 4 December 15, 2017

5. Special operating instructions and procedures.

1.9 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT OPERATION MANUALS

A. Systems and Equipment Operation Manual: Assemble a complete set of data indicating operation of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include information re- quired for daily operation and management, operating standards, and routine and special operat- ing procedures. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Government's operating personnel.

B. Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individual Specification Sections and the following information: 1. System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equip- ment indicated on Contract Documents. 2. Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility. 3. Operating standards. 4. Operating procedures. 5. Operating logs. 6. Wiring diagrams. 7. Control diagrams. 8. Piped system diagrams. 9. Precautions against improper use. 10. License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.

C. Descriptions: Include the following: 1. Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract Documents. a. Manufacturer's name. b. Equipment identification with serial number of each component. c. Equipment function. d. Operating characteristics. e. Limiting conditions. f. Performance curves. g. Engineering data and tests. h. Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts. 2. Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable: a. Startup procedures.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017823 - 5 December 15, 2017

b. Equipment or system break-in procedures. c. Routine and normal operating instructions. d. Regulation and control procedures. e. Instructions on stopping. f. Normal shutdown instructions. g. Seasonal and weekend operating instructions. h. Required sequences for electric or electronic systems. i. Special operating instructions and procedures.

D. Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.

E. Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color coding where required for identifi- cation.

1.10 SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Systems and Equipment Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of data indicating maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. Include manufacturers' maintenance documentation, preventive maintenance procedures and frequency, repair procedures, wiring and systems diagrams, lists of spare parts, and warranty information. 1. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system. 2. Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual for use by Government's operating personnel.

B. Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include source information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance and service schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warranties and bonds as described below.

C. Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identified by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

D. Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Include the following information for each compo- nent part or piece of equipment: 1. Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins; include only sheets pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or component incorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item us- ing appropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and delete references to information not applicable.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017823 - 6 December 15, 2017

a. Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems. 2. Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and component removal, replacement, and assembly. 3. Identification and nomenclature of parts and components. 4. List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenance procedures: 1. Test and inspection instructions. 2. Troubleshooting guide. 3. Precautions against improper maintenance. 4. Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions. 5. Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.

F. Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of required lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and ser- vice with standard time allotment. 1. Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarter- ly, semiannual, and annual frequencies. 2. Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.

G. Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identified and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenance materials and related services.

H. Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and tele- phone number of service agent.

I. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

J. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

K. Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relation- ship of component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow di- agrams. Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure cor- rect illustration of completed installation.

L. Do not use original project record documents as part of maintenance manuals.

1.11 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care and maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017823 - 7 December 15, 2017

B. Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include source information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warranties and bonds, as described below.

C. Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and ar- ranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.

D. Product Information: Include the following, as applicable: 1. Product name and model number. 2. Manufacturer's name. 3. Color, pattern, and texture. 4. Material and chemical composition. 5. Reordering information for specially manufactured products.

E. Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following: 1. Inspection procedures. 2. Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning. 3. List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product. 4. Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance. 5. Repair instructions.

F. Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and related services.

G. Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditions that would affect validity of warranties or bonds. 1. Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS (NOT USED)

PART 3 – EXECUTION (NOT USED)

END OF SECTION 017823

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017823 - 8 December 15, 2017

SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, in- cluding the following: 1. Record Drawings. 2. Record Specifications. 3. Record Product Data. 4. Miscellaneous record submittals.

B. Related Requirements: 1. Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for general closeout procedures. 2. Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data" for operation and maintenance manual requirements. 3. Section 230900 “Instrumentation and Control Systems” for submittal requirements.

1.3 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Record Drawings: Comply with the following: 1. Initial Submittal: a. Comply with Section 230900 “Instrumentation and Controls” for required submittals. b. Engineer, COR or Engineering Project Manager will indicate whether general scope of changes, additional information recorded, and quality of drafting are acceptable. 2. Final Submittal: a. Comply with Section 230900 “Instrumentation and Controls” for required submittals.

1.4 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings, incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

B. Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entity is Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of corre- sponding marked-up record prints.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017839 - 1 December 15, 2017

1. Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult to identify or measure and record later. 2. Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique. 3. Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it. 4. Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.

C. Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Dimensional changes to Drawings. 2. Revisions to details shown on Drawings. 3. Depths of foundations. 4. Locations and depths of underground utilities. 5. Revisions to routing of piping and conduits. 6. Revisions to electrical circuitry. 7. Actual equipment locations. 8. Duct size and routing. 9. Locations of concealed internal utilities. 10. Changes made by Change Order or Change Directive. 11. Changes made following CO written orders. 12. Details not on the original Contract Drawings. 13. Field records for variable and concealed conditions. 14. Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.

D. Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel profi- cient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.

E. Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between changes for different categories of the Work at same location.

F. Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from orig- inal Drawings.

G. Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and similar identification, where applicable.

H. Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING" in a prominent location. 1. Record Prints: Organize record prints into manageable sets. Bind each set with durable pa- per cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets. 2. Format: Annotated PDF electronic file 3. Identification: As follows: a. Project name.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017839 - 2 December 15, 2017

b. Date. c. Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS." d. Name of Engineer e. Name of Contractor.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

PART 3 – EXECUTION

END OF SECTION 017839

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017839 - 3 December 15, 2017

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017839 - 4 December 15, 2017

SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

PART 1 – GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Condi- tions and other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Government's per- sonnel, including the following: 1. On-site instruction in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment. a. At minimum 16 hours of training for all necessary APHIS personnel upon project com- pletion. b. 8 additional hours of training 30 days following. 2. Off-site Certified-Manufacturers training at Factory Training Facility. a. 40 hours of training for 2 APHIS facilities personnel at factory training facility. 1) No additional cost to Government for training. 2) Government will pay for travel and lodging. 3. Demonstration and training video recordings.

1.3 INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS

A. Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, in- cluding a list of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors' names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

B. Qualification Data: For instructor

C. Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.

1.4 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. At completion of training, submit complete training manual(s) for Government's use prepared in same format required for operation and maintenance manuals specified in Section 017823 "Oper- ation and Maintenance Data."

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnel in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work has resulted in training or education with a record of successful learning perfor- mance.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017900 - 1 December 15, 2017

B. Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with require- ments in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance pro- cedures and training.

C. Off-site Factory Training Facility: A formal classroom training environment provided at the man- ufacturers facility. Classroom shall provide a computer workstation for each individual student installed with the same product and version installed in this Contract. Instructors workstation shall be visible to all students and provide the same product and version as student Classroom shall have the appropriate number of seating, tables, workstations, simulators for the number of students enrolled in the class and no less due to over-booking the class. Classroom is to be free of external noise or disturbances. Restroom facilities are to be provided in same building and within reasonable distance from classrooms. Proper lighting and temperature of classroom will be pro- vided for learning environment.

D. Pre-instruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures relat- ed to demonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following: 1. Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction. 2. Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors' personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays. 3. Review required content of instruction. 4. For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate on-site instruction schedule with Government's operations. Adjust schedule as re- quired to minimize disrupting Government's operations and to ensure availability of Govern- ment's personnel.

B. Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, and course content.

C. Coordinate manufacturer’s factory training with Government to minimize disrupting Govern- ment's operations and to ensure availability of Government's personnel. Provide Government at least 45 days’ notice of scheduled training date for their travel arrangements.

D. Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data have been reviewed and approved by Engineer.

1.7 INSTRUCTION PROGRAM

A. Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for each system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sec- tions.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017900 - 2 December 15, 2017

B. Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include a description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each mod- ule, include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component: a. On-Site Training 1) Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the fol- lowing: a) System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. b) Operating standards. c) Equipment function. d) Operating characteristics. e) Limiting conditions. 2) Documentation: Review the following items in detail: a) Emergency manuals. b) Systems and equipment operation manuals. c) Systems and equipment maintenance manuals. d) Control enclosure documentation sleeve. e) Product maintenance manuals. f) Project Record Documents. g) Warranties. 3) Operations: Include the following, as applicable: a) Startup procedures. b) Routine and normal operating instructions. c) Control sequences. d) Safety procedures. e) Normal shutdown instructions. f) Normal restart instructions. g) Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure. h) Upon normal power return. 4) Adjustments: Include the following: a) Calibrating instruments, sensors, actuators. b) Economy and efficiency adjustments. 5) Troubleshooting: Include the following: a) Diagnostic instructions. b) Test and inspection procedures. c) How to contact Manufacturer for support.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017900 - 3 December 15, 2017

6) Maintenance: Include the following: a) Inspection procedures. b) Procedures for preventive maintenance. c) Procedures for routine maintenance. d) Instruction on use of special software field tools. 7) Repairs: Include the following: a) Diagnosis instructions. b) Repair instructions. c) Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly in- structions. d) Instructions for identifying parts and components. e) Review of spare parts. f) How to contact Manufacturer for scheduling repair. b. Off-site Manufacturer’s Factory Training 1) BAS Software Administration a) User account create, modify, delete. b) User account password, reset, special requirements. c) Access groups or privileges d) Restricting, limiting access to parts of the BAS software. e) Software, controller, protocol licensing. 2) BAS Alarm Management a) Basics of an alarm b) Alarm management application. c) Alarm priorities, time delays, etc. d) Alarm create, modify, delete. e) Access historical data for past alarm events. f) Configure remote notification of alarms to pagers and cell phones. 3) BAS Trend Log Management a) Basics of a trend object; COV, Interval. b) Trend log management and reporting application. c) Trend create, modify, delete. d) Long term archiving of trend data. e) Access trend data reports f) Exporting trend data to Excel

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017900 - 4 December 15, 2017

4) BAS Controller Management a) How to replace a controller. b) How to backup controller database to BAS server. c) How to import a controller backup file. d) How to troubleshoot a controller that is off-line. e) How to restore a controller. 5) BAS Programming a) Basics to controller programming b) How to create, modify, delete programming c) Program editor application. 6) BAS Graphics a) What are graphics b) Where are graphics stored. c) Create, modify, delete graphics d) Adding live controller points to graphics e) Graphic editor package basics f) Creating navigation links between graphics. 7) BAS Point Database a) What is a point; virtual, physical, point types. b) Create, modify, delete points. c) Controller input/outputs and addressing. d) How to adjust scaling for different inputs. e) How to adjust calibration of inputs. 8) BAS Server Backup / Restore a) How to schedule a routine database backup b) How to perform a manual backup c) Backup to local disk or network drive d) How to restore a database.

1.8 PREPARATION

A. Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module. Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with re- quirements in Section 017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017900 - 5 December 15, 2017

1.9 INSTRUCTION

A. Facilitator: Contractor to engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, to coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Government for number of participants, instruction times, and location.

B. Off-site Factory-Certified Training: Contractor to engage the manufacturer to have a Factory- Certified Instructor facilitate the Manufacturers approved instruction program and training mod- ules. Instruction program to instruct Government’s personnel on the use of the installed system in this Contract.

C. On-site Training: Contractor to engage qualified instructors to instruct Government's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems, subsystems, and equipment not part of a system. 1. Government will furnish Contractor with names and positions of participants.

D. Scheduling On-site Training: Provide instruction at mutually agreed-on times. 1. Schedule On-site Training with Government, through APHIS Facilities Manager with at least seven days’ advance notice. The COR to be copied on any scheduling correspondence related to the On-site Training. a. 8 hours of instruction on-site upon project completion. b. 8 hours additional instruction on-site 30 days later.

E. Scheduling Manufacturer’s Factory-Certified Training: Schedule training with Government for APHIS personnel 40 hours instruction each. The COR to be copied on any scheduling corre- spondence related to the manufacturer’s factory certified training. 1. This is for two APHIS personnel 40 hours each. 2. Government needs 45 days’ notice ahead of instruction to make travel arrangements. 3. The On-site training should be completed prior to scheduled Manufacturer’s Factory- Certified Training. 4. Government pays for travel and lodging. 5. No additional cost for this training to Government.

F. Training Location and Reference Material: 1. On-site training to be conducted in the completed and fully operational facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance data submittals. 2. Manufacturer’s Factory Training to be conducted at Manufacturer’s Factory Authorized Training Facility. Conduct training with Manufacturer’s training material for product in- stalled under this Contract.

G. Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Government. Remove in- structional equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017900 - 6 December 15, 2017

1.10 DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING VIDEO RECORDINGS 1. The Government will be allowed to video tape any or all the On-site Training sessions for their use.

PART 2 – PRODUCTS

PART 3 – EXECUTION

END OF SECTION 017900

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017900 - 7 December 15, 2017

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 017900 - 8 December 15, 2017 SECTION 230900 – INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL SYSTEMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

B. Section 260500, “Common Work Results for Electrical” is directly related to work included in this section.

C. Section 260519, “Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” is directly related to work included in this section.

D. Section 260533, “Raceway and Boxes” is directly related to work included in this section.

E. Section 271500, “Communications Horizontal Cabling” is directly related to work included in this section. Other sections are indirectly related and shall be reviewed.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This is a single phase prime contract. The Prime Contractor shall be responsible for either performing the duties or subcontracting with a qualified Controls or Automation Contractor. The Prime Contractor will be the single point of contact ultimately responsible for coordinating and ensuring the BAS is operation and commissioned in this section.

B. Provide a Building Automation System (BAS) for Moore Air Base with future base-wide capacity to control and/or to monitor building systems as outlined in the sequences of operation, drawings and this specification. Provide all controls design, hardware, software, communications cabling, wiring, parts and labor required in establishing a complete and working system that is an interoperable network per this Contract drawings and specifications.

C. Any reference to Phase 1 will refer to this Contract drawings and specifications. Any reference to future phases is for Contractor’s proper sizing and configuration of Government’s future expansion plans, future work shall be bid and awarded separately. The system shall have capacity to handle at least 25 buildings/utility locations through internet and remote locations up to 4 miles away via radio signals.

D. The following is a description of what systems, utility or buildings are in the scope of work for Phase 1 and future phases. 1. Provide controls design, labor, hardware, components, devices, BAS software, licensing, drivers on Government supplied computers for a complete and functioning system. Design and provide remote I/O radio equipment for a complete and functioning system. Included is the scope: a. Provide quantity of four computer monitors, 32”, full HD, LED and wall mounts with (3 axis tilt). Install in Building 6407 Facilities, coordinated installation with APHIS Facilities Manager. To be installed on APHIS supplied computer and special graphic card for Niagara Workstation.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 1 December 15, 2017 b. Provide quantity of two computer monitors, 28”, full HD, LED. Install in office of Water Treatment Plant on APHIS supplied computer and special graphic card for Niagara Workstation. c. BAS Niagara enterprise server loaded on computer to be located in Building 6407 IDF. Niagara client loaded on computers located in Water Treatment Plant Office, Guard Shack, Building 6407 Facilities main office area, Building 6407 Facilities Manager’s Office, and Building 6414 Director’s Office. d. BAS shall be provided with remote notification via paging & text messaging to cell phones fully configured with necessary contacts as directed by Government. e. Remote radio I/O design, labor, hardware, installation, wiring for complete functioning system. Demo existing radio I/O equipment in the MTU panel at the Water Treatment Plant and Water Tower RTU panel. Master radio to be located in the Water Treatment Plant with new Yagi antenna mounted at old antenna location aimed toward the Water Tower. Slave radio to be located at the Water Tower with new Omni-directional antenna mounted atop the Water Tower mounted to railing of walkway on air strip side. Wire available 120VAC power at Water Tower location as necessary. Provide, route and support radio antenna cable as necessary to reach antenna location atop the Water Tower. Refer to drawings for details. f. Water Treatment Plant – Provide necessary design, installation, software, drivers, licensing, hardware, electrical components, and wiring to complete the work of SCADA Panel demo & retrofit, providing Radio I/O master station at WTP and Water Tower Radio I/O slave station. Refer to drawings for details. g. Building 6403 – Provide necessary design, installation, software, drivers, licensing, hardware, electrical components, and wiring to complete the work of monitoring (Qty of 12) Environmental Growth Chambers, (Qty of 5) Greenhouses, (Qty of 1) Chilled Water System, (Qty of 1) Hot Water System, and (Qty of 1) Generator/ATS. Refer to drawings for details. h. Building 6414 – Provide necessary design, installation, software, drivers, licensing, hardware, electrical components, and wiring to complete the work of monitoring (Qty of 8) Environmental Growth Cambers, (Qty of 9) Ultra-low Freezers/Refers, (Qty 1) Chilled Water System, (Qty of 1) Hot Water System, and (Qty of 1) Generator/ATS. Refer to drawings for details. 2. Future phases –Included in Government’s future expansion plans: a. Lift Station –Monitoring lift station level and pump status through remote Radio I/O. b. Water Reservoir – Monitoring reservoir water level through remote Radio I/O. c. Building 6420 Traps & Lures – Monitor outdoor freezer temperature. Provide controllers with at least 50 available points. Points list to be determined. d. Acid Skid Building – Monitoring of Acid Skid PLC. Points list to be determined. e. Building 6418 Mexican Fruit Fly - Provide controllers with at least 50 available points. Points list to be determined. f. New Wastewater Treatment Plant - Provide monitoring for the following points: 120VAC power failure alarm, equalization tank pH Monitoring, equalization tank blower BLR-1050 run command, train No.1 STM-Aerator enable command, train No.1 internal recycle pump P-1120 motor moisture detected, train No.1 internal recycle pump P-1120 run command, train No. 1 aeration blower BLR-1130 run

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 2 December 15, 2017 command, train No. 1 digester BLR-1130 fan encl. motor fault, and (Qty of 1) Generator/ATS. Communication through Radio I/O. g. New Mexican Fruit Fly Rearing Facility - Provide controllers with at least 50 available points. Points list to be determined. h. Additional buildings and utilities may be added.

E. The building and utility systems to be included in the BAS for (monitoring only): 1. Environmental Growth Chambers (EGCs) – Growth camber temperature and humidity 2. Ultra-low Freezers / Refrigerators – Internal temperature 3. Boilers – Boiler run status, boiler alarm, circulation pump statuses, hot water supply temperature. 4. Chillers – Chiller run status, chiller alarm, circulation pump statuses, ea. chiller supply water temperature, building supply water temperature. 5. Generators / Automatic Transfer Switches – Generator run status, generator alarm, phase loss. 6. Water treatment plant a. SCADA Panel Retrofit 7. Greenhouses – Space temperature.

F. All labor, material, equipment and software not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that is required to meet the functional intent of this specification, shall be provided without additional cost to the Government.

G. It shall be understood that the details and drawings provided with the specifications package are diagrammatic. They are included to show the intent of the specifications and to aid the Contractor in bidding the job.

H. It is the Government’s goal to implement an open system that will allow products from various suppliers to be integrated into a unified system to provide flexibility for expansion, maintenance, and service of the system. The Government shall be the named license holder of all software associated with all incremental work on the project(s).

1.3 APPROVED MANUFACTURERS

A. Provide an Building Automation System with distributed processing units, input/output units, firmware and standard operating software manufactured by Alerton, Distech, Honeywell, Tridium Vykon based on Niagara 4.0 Framework and ASHRAE Standard 135 BACnet technology that meets or exceeds this specification. 1. BACnet controllers by manufacturer must have been tested by the BACnet Testing Laboratories and received a BTL Mark of conformance to implementation and interoperability. 2. Manufacturer, vendor or local representative must have a permanent business office within 6 hours or less vehicle drive of Edinberg, Texas. 3. Manufacturer, vendor or local representative must have at least 5 installations of similar size and scope to this work.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 3 December 15, 2017 4. Manufacturer, vendor or local representative must have a service department capable of contacting the Government within 2 hours from initial phone call request during normal working hours. A site visit shall be answered within 48 hours of initial request. 5. Design, component selection, installation, custom programming, documentation, testing, training and warranty service shall be the direct responsibility of the Prime Contractor. 6. New equipment and software shall be selected for compatibility with systems that are presently installed at the site upon any future phase of the project.

B. Provide a remote I/O data radio system with all power supplies, transceivers, input/output cards, antennas, antenna cabling, surge protection manufactured by Phoenix Contact based on Radioline – 900 Mhz wireless transmission system for I/O signals or approved equal. 1. Design, component selection, panel shop, installation, custom programming, documentation, testing, training and warranty service shall be the direct responsibility of the Prime Contractor. 2. New radio equipment and software shall be selected for compatibility with systems that are presently installed at the site upon any future phase of the project. 3. Radio transceivers must be capable of Mesh Technology and have expansion capabilities to support future expansion plans.

1.4 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

A. It is the Governments express goal to implement an open system that will allow products from various suppliers to be integrated into a unified system in order to provide flexibility for expansion, maintenance, and service of the system. The Government shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental work on the project(s). In addition, the Government shall receive ownership of all job specific configuration documentation, data files, and application-level software developed for the project. This shall include all custom, job specific software code and documentation for all configuration and programming that is generated for a given project and/or configured for use with the JACE, FMCS Server(s), and any related LAN / WAN / Intranet and Internet connected routers and devices. Any and all required IDs and passwords for access to any component or software program shall be provided to the Government. The Government shall determine which organizations to be named in the SI organization ID (“orgid”) of all software licenses. Government shall be free to direct the modification of the “orgid” in any software license, regardless of supplier, by Tridium Inc.

1.5 DEFINITIONS

A. BACnet: ASHRAE Standard 135 building automation and control networking protocol.

B. CSR: Current-sensing relay

C. BAS: Direct digital control.

D. EGC: Environmental Growth Chambers

E. I/O: Input/output.

F. JACE: Java Application Control Engine is hardware loaded with Niagara Firmware which provides an open communication between different technology and hardware.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 4 December 15, 2017 G. Modbus: Open communication protocol based on TCP/IP or MS/TP used with industrial control applications.

H. MS/TP: Master slave/token passing.

I. PC: Personal computer.

J. PID: Proportional plus integral plus derivative.

K. RTD: Resistance temperature detector.

L. TCP/IP: Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol is the basic communication language of the Internet and used in private networks.

1.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE

A. Comply with the following performance requirements: 1. Graphic Display: Display graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within 10 seconds. 2. Graphic Refresh: Update graphic with minimum 20 dynamic points with current data within eight seconds. 3. Object Command: Reaction time of less than two seconds between operator command of a binary object and device reaction. 4. Object Scan: Transmit change of state and change of analog values to control units or workstation within six seconds. 5. Alarm Response Time: Annunciate alarm at workstation within 45 seconds. Multiple workstations must receive alarms within five seconds of each other. 6. Program Execution Frequency: Run capability of applications as often as five seconds, but selected consistent with mechanical process under control. 7. Performance: Programmable controllers shall execute BAS PID control loops, and scan and update process values and outputs at least once per second. 8. Reporting Accuracy and Stability of Control: Report values and maintain measured variables within tolerances as follows: a. Water Temperature: Plus or minus one degree F. b. Water Flow: Plus or minus five percent of full scale. c. Water Pressure: Plus or minus two percent of full scale. d. Space Temperature: Plus or minus one degree F. e. Ducted Air Temperature: Plus or minus one degree F. f. Outside Air Temperature: Plus or minus two degrees F. g. Dew Point Temperature: Plus or minus three degrees F. h. Temperature Differential: Plus or minus 0.25 degrees F. i. Relative Humidity: Plus or minus five percent. j. Airflow (Pressurized Spaces): Plus or minus three percent of full scale.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 5 December 15, 2017 k. Airflow (Measuring Stations): Plus or minus five percent of full scale. l. Airflow (Terminal): Plus or minus 10 percent of full scale. m. Air Pressure (Space): Plus or minus 0.01-inch wg. n. Air Pressure (Ducts): Plus or minus 0.1-inch wg. o. Carbon Monoxide: Plus or minus five percent of reading. p. Carbon Dioxide: Plus or minus 50 ppm. q. Electrical: Plus or minus five percent of reading.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Prior to construction, the Contractor shall submit complete system schematic design, shop drawings and product data cutsheets per the Contract Documents for approval. 1. 5 hard copies of complete submittal delivered. a. Design Engineer – 2 hard copies b. Engineering Project Manager – 1 hard copy c. COR – 2 hard copies. 2. Provided reduced size (11” x 17”) drawings and system graphics. Drawings shall also contain complete wiring and schematic diagrams, software descriptions, calculations, and any other details required to demonstrate that the system has been coordinated and will properly function as a system. Terminal identification for all control wiring shall be shown. A complete point list of all points to be connected to the BAS by the Contractor. A trunk cable schematic diagram depicting operator workstations, control panel locations and a description of the communication type, media and protocol. The Contractor shall be responsible for integrating those diagrams into the overall trunk cable schematic diagrams for the entire Wide Area Network (WAN). 3. Provided on 8 ½ x 11 size paper a complete bill of materials, including manufacturers catalog data sheets and installation instructions. A complete written Sequence of Operation shall also be included with the submittal package. Data Communications Protocol Certificates: Certify that each proposed BAS component complies with ASHRAE 135 and BTL listing. 4. Provide on 11x17 size paper a copy of each of the graphics to be developed for the Graphic User Interface including a flowchart (site map) indicating how the graphics are to be linked to one another for system navigation. The graphics are intended to be 80% - 90% complete at this stage with the only remaining changes to be based on review comments from the A/E design team and/or Government. See this section 230900 paragraph 3.2.H for specifics on graphics work to be submitted.

B. Prior to scheduled Startup and Commissioning provide a detailed testing plan and documentation describing the specific procedures used to complete and document as described in the Final Acceptance requirement for approval. See this section 230900 Part 1.10 “System Commissioning” for specifics. 1. Submit to Design Engineer and COR for approval electronically 30 days prior to scheduled Startup and Commissioning. 2. Provide submittal in single PDF file format via email.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 6 December 15, 2017 3. Test plans shall include a complete schedule for tracking each phase of the testing, e.g. zone testing by floor, fan testing by system, chiller interface testing, heating system testing, etc. 4. The vendor is required to supplement the planned work effort to meet the progress dates given in the schedule. 5. Provide printout of programming code. 6. Show initial setpoints. 7. Provide all documentation necessary to interpret programming related submittals. 8. Provide formatted data sheet for this project to recording PTP testing and sequence-of- operations testing.

C. Prior to completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit the completed Startup & Commissioning test documentation for approval. See this section 230900 paragraph 1.10 for commissioning specifics. 1. Submit to Design Engineer and COR for approval electronically prior to preparation of record documentation. 2. Provide submittal in single PDF file format via email.

D. Upon completion of the work, the Contractor shall submit complete As-builts and Operations & Maintenance manual for record documentation: 1. Comply with Section 017823 “Operation and Maintenance Data” and Section 017700 “Closeout Procedures”. 2. Initial submittal provide 5 hard copies of complete submittal delivered. a. Design Engineer – 2 hard copies b. Engineering Project Manager – 1 hard copy c. COR – 2 hard copies 3. Final submittal provide 3 hard copies and 4 CD-ROM copies of complete submittal delivered. a. Design Engineer –2 CD-ROMs. b. Engineering Project Manager – 1 hard copy plus 1 CD-ROM c. COR – 2 hard copies plus 1 CD ROM 4. Submit drawings reflecting final “as-built” condition. a. Provide a single PDF complied of all drawings on submitted CD-ROMs. b. Provide record drawings in AutoCAD™ file format on submitted CD-ROMs. c. All drawings must be reproducible. d. These record drawings shall accurately depict the final as-built conditions. e. These drawings shall include accurate depiction of location of sensors and controlled equipment (motor starters, valves, chillers, dampers, AHUs, etc.)

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 7 December 15, 2017 5. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals: Describe operation, maintenance and servicing requirements of the BAS and associated equipment. Provide the following information in separate sections, each with an index. a. Operation and Maintenance (O&M) Manuals submittal must be approved prior to any Demonstration and Training. See Section 017900 “Demonstration and Training”. b. Technical literature for all equipment, including catalog sheets, calibration, adjustments and operation instructions, and installation instructions c. Hardware and software manuals, including information supplied by the original product developer, on the application programs and on the computers and controllers provided by vendor d. System description and complete sequence of operation e. Reduced size (11” x 17”) copies of record drawings f. Input/Output (I/O) summary forms for the system, listing all connected analog and binary input and output functions and the number and types of points. Indicate spare input/output capacity g. Control programs specific to this system h. Completed point-to-point checkout plan used in Government-witnessed testing, and the completed data sheets showing the results of the point-to-point testing.

1.8 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. All materials and equipment used shall be new, standard components, regularly manufactured and not custom-designed or fabricated specifically for this project.

B. All components and software shall have been previously tested and proven in regular use. Minimum in-use requirements are 24 months for hardware and 12 months for major software (whole number revision) releases.

C. Modularity. The BAS shall possess a modular architecture, permitting expansion through the addition of more distributed processing units, input/output units, sensors, actuators and operator stations.

D. Installer Qualifications: Automatic control system manufacturer's authorized representative who is trained and approved for installation of system components required for this Project.

E. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, Article 100, by a testing agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended use.

F. Comply with ASHRAE 135 and BTL listing for BAS components.

G. System Software: Update to latest version of software at Project completion.

H. Approval - Vendor shall submit and receive approval for all submittals including materials, floor plan, schematics and programming prior to installation.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 8 December 15, 2017 1.9 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate location of thermostats, carbon dioxide sensors, and other exposed control sensors with plans and room details before installation.

B. Coordinate with APHIS Facilities Manager for required 120VAC power requirements of BAS components when existing 120VAC circuits identified during controls demolition or retrofit are unavailable. It’s the responsibility of the Contractor to provide complete wiring to available 120VAC power as directed by APHIS Facilities.

C. Coordinate with APHIS Facilities Manager for providing required computer hardware to complete the BAS software installation and configuration. Provide 12 months of lead time when coordinating for government supplied computer hardware. It’s the responsibility of the contractor to ensure the coordination results in hardware meeting or exceeding the software requirements of their BAS software as specified.

D. Coordinate with APHIS Facilities Manager for providing required APHIS networking drops, locations, network settings, and configuration. Coordinate providing at least 6 months of lead time for APHIS Facilities to coordinate completion of network installation prior to when required.

E. Coordinate with APHIS Facilities Manager for access to Building 6403 Quarantine. See Division 01 Specification section 011000 “Summary” for specifics on access to this building.

1.10 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING

A. Contractor’s Startup & Commissioning test plan shall be submitted for approval of draft and completed documentation.

B. Provide staff and materials to conduct the commissioning activities including all testing apparatus in use by the BAS contractor to test and calibrate or verify calibration of the control system.

C. Government or their representative may witness all or part of the Contractor’s testing. 1. Upon Contractor receiving approval of their Startup & Commissioning plan the Government shall be notified 10 working days before Contractor’s testing begins.

D. Contractor Startup & Commissioning test plan shall at minimum consist of the following: 1. Point-to-Point verification tests: a. Documentation shall have one line for each physical point on the system, and columns to record the results, dates, and initials of witnesses for both pretests and witness tests. b. Each physical point on the system shall be physically checked between control end device and controller addressed physical input or output for any discrepancies. c. Any discrepancies, wiring or malfunctioning devices are resolved by the Contractor and re-tested. 2. Installation verification tests: a. Documentation shall have one line for each physical point on the system, and columns to record the results, dates, and initials of witnesses for both pretests and witness tests.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 9 December 15, 2017 b. Verify operation, location and identification of power sources, including circuit breakers and control power transformers. c. Start/stop points: Issue start and stop commands from an operator station. Verify that controlled equipment responds appropriately and that the start/stop status is accurately reflected at the operator station. d. Analog points: Analog inputs and outputs shall be verified at both extremes of their ranges and at the midpoint. Verify tight shutoff and full opening of dampers and valves. e. Binary points: Verify that both commanded conditions (on/off, open/closed, etc.) are accurately reflected at the operator station. f. Test fan and pump failure alarms by turning off the motor at the HOA switch and observing the run-state indication at the operator station. g. Temperature points: Verify calibration of sensors by comparing displayed temperature values with the reading of an independent measuring device located in the same flow. Test liquid temperature sensors as installed in piping thermowells to verify effectiveness of heat conducting compound. h. Pressure points: Verify calibration of sensors by comparing displayed pressure with the reading of an independent measuring device located in the same flow stream. Retain the services of the balancer as required to confirm readings. i. Control valves: Verify tight shutoff by comparing water or air temperatures entering and leaving the heat transfer device. j. Operator response and sequencing: Demonstrate that sequenced or modulated valves and dampers position accurately in response to posit multiple operators to provide simultaneous modulation of parallel dampers or valve assemblies. k. Control signal stability, general: Demonstrate that control loops are tuned so that the output does not change until the controlled system has had time to respond to the last output signal. l. Control signal stability, response to step input: Demonstrate that control loops are tuned so that they are stable without excessive hunting following a step input of not less than 20% of the operating/reset range of the controlled variable. m. Control signal stability, floating point devices: Verify that minimum pulse output duration is no less than the value required to assure repositioning of the controlled device. n. Demonstrate the capability of the controls system to execute the complete sequence of operation as given in the mechanical design documents. o. Verify tight shut-off of all actuated control valves (for three-way valves, demonstrate capacity for 100% by-pass of coil). 3. Operator station tests: a. Documentation shall provide the approved sequence-of-operation, the desired outcome for each individual operation, result, dates, and initials of witnesses for both pretests and witness tests. b. Override test: Verify manual override capability for start/stop and modulated point types.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 10 December 15, 2017 c. Control logic: 1) Exercise all control logic packages. 2) Check response to upset, change in setpoint. d. Supervisory function: 1) Verify content of time clock schedules. 2) Verify alarm’s reporting capabilities. 3) Verify remote notification paging or cell phone capabilities. e. Failure modes: 1) Verify all stand-alone operation by disconnecting communication lines between stand-alone control units and verifying continued operation. 2) Disconnect and reconnect controller power to confirm proper recovery from power failure (sample). f. Other software tests: 1) Trend logging 2) Report generation 3) Remote access 4) Test the ability of the control system to automatically restart all of the connected systems following a power restoration and fire alarm recovery.

1.11 FINAL ACCEPTANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Approval of all submittals.

B. Provide corrected documentation to show changes made to correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning tests. Reassemble manuals and drawing packages to reflect corrected documentation records.

C. Insert one copy of JACE & controller database on CD, applicable shop drawings, panel layout drawing, and points list at each control enclosure’s documentation holder.

D. Furnish one original set of application software on CDs. Disks shall bear the manufacturer’s label. Field copies are not acceptable. Application software includes operating system, controls application generation, graphic support, maintenance support and all other utilities provided in support of the installed system. Deliver to APHIS Facilities Manager.

E. Furnish a backup of BAS computer database on CDs. This backup shall be made at completion of all work in the Contract. Data in backup shall be all that is necessary to return the entire BAS system to the as installed configuration for disaster recovery. Deliver to APHIS Facilities Manager.

1.12 SERVICE AND GUARANTEE

A. The complete control system shall be warranted to be free of defects in manufacturing, workmanship and materials for one year from the date of Government acceptance. Temperature

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 11 December 15, 2017 sensor accuracy shall be warranted for three years. Software and documentation shall be revised to reflect system changes required to meet warranty obligations. 1. Manufacturer, vendor or local representative must have a permanent business office within 6 hours or less vehicle drive of Edinberg, Texas. 2. Manufacturer, vendor or local representative must have a service department capable of contacting the Government within 2 hours from initial phone call request during normal working hours. A site visit shall be answered within 48 hours of initial request.

B. Provide free of charge during the warranty period four BAS software sequence modifications (up to 24 hours engineering time) as instructed by the Government. Modification shall be in software only.

1.13 POST-INSTALLATION TRAINING AND MATERIALS

A. Training is the responsibility of the Prime Contractor and any sub-contracted Controls / Automation Contractors. For training see Div 01 Section 017900 “Demonstration and Training” in addition to this section. 1. The Government will be allowed to video tape any or all of the On-site training sessions.

1.14 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION

A. See Drawing M-500.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Refer to this section 230900 Part 3 for additional information specific to the configurations, programming and installation of provided products.

B. Provide as required for a complete and operating building automation system, all software, hardware, input/output devices, wiring and control power not shown in electrical bid documents, actuated dampers, actuated valves, actuators, operation and maintenance training, special maintenance tools and aids, supervision of labor, and warranty.

C. The system shall be built only of standard components kept in stock by the supplier. 1. All replacement parts shall be available on site within 48 hours. 2. The components shall not require customizing other than setting jumpers and switches, or adding firmware or software modules, or on-site software programming to do required functions.

D. System display should meet the following requirements: 1. The system is to be fully menu-driven. 2. All system titles, prompts, and instructions are to be in the English language. 3. All entries to be in natural units, i.e., a setpoint value shall be entered in its actual control unit of value, such as 74º F.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 12 December 15, 2017 4. The primary means of information display and system management shall be by graphic display. Use the same style of display as is currently used throughout the facility. 5. Each display will contain comment sections to indicate area served (if area-specific) and also contain a graphical presentation for all other interlocked systems.

2.2 OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURES

A. The intent of this specification is to provide a Niagara 4.0 peer-to-peer networked, distributed control system integrated with ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001 BACnet, in one open, interoperable system.

B. All BACnet device control units must be marked with BTL (BACnet Testing Laboratories) having obtained BTL listing for product by manufacturer or a BTL Certificate of Performance document.

C. The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence to industry standards including ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2001, BACnet to assure interoperability between all system components is required. For each BACnet device, the device supplier must submit for review by the Engineer and COR a PICS/BIBBS documents showing the installed device’s compliance level. Minimum compliance shall be the ability to support data read and write functionality and those features as specified. Physical connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet (BACnet Ethernet/IP,) and/or RS-485 (BACnet MSTP) as specified.

D. All components and controllers supplied under this Division shall be true “peer-to-peer” communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass data shall not be acceptable.

E. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using standard Web browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. An Open DataBase Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for all database access. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable.

F. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal Intranet network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable.

1. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces.

2.3 BASIC SYSTEM FEATURES

A. Zone-by-zone control of space temperature, usage scheduling, and equipment failure reporting (A zone is the area served by one HVAC terminal unit, fan coil, heat pump, air terminal, etc.)

B. For all controllers and other devices that do not automatically and immediately resume normal operation after loss of power and then restoration of power, provide Werner Electric Stabiline UPS (Uninterruptable Power Supply) model SW1500 (or approved equal having five-year battery

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 13 December 15, 2017 life and battery hot swappable capability) for all cabinets having a mounting area over 120 square inches and containing controllers. These cabinets shall be provided with a fused duplex receptacle to be used a source for UPS power. Cabinet shall draw power from the UPS. Provide shelf for UPS.

C. All control power shall be provided from 120 VAC emergency power sources located in the “low voltage” closets on each floor and in the mechanical rooms.

D. Tamper-proof room wall mounted sensors installed with Allen, Bristol or similar hardware with local temperature setpoint adjustment (limited range). The maximum allowed temperature range shall be set from an operator’s station. Program the local control ranges as follows: 1. Standard thermostats - 68F to 74F 2. Mechanical and electrical rooms - 50F to 85F

E. Space temperature control in specifically identified locations will use return/exhaust duct mounted sensors and setpoint will be adjusted with computer interface.

F. Individually assignable priority password security system to prevent unauthorized use. Provide at least four levels including the following: Information only, change of setpoint & ON/OFF, programmer, and a fourth master level for assigning appropriate local access.

G. Equipment monitoring and alarm function including information for diagnosing equipment problems. 1. All system points shall be programmed to report alarm conditions by fully expanded point names that are tailored and specific to this project. 2. Assign alarm limits at 10% above highest expected level and at 10% below lowest expected level (subject to control sequence design) or as requested by Government. 3. Interlock all alarm points to system status so as to lock out alarms when the system is not operational by schedule or operator command.

H. Auto-restart, without operator intervention, the operator stations and all controlled equipment to the control state that would be in effect if the power failure or fire alarm event had not occurred. Start/stop outputs shall continue to command the affected device while motor power is unavailable and allow for equipment restart, as previously commanded or scheduled, upon restoration of motor power.

I. Equipment run-time totalization of motor driven equipment.

J. Interactive displays of all input and output points: As a minimum, each of 200 screens on the monitor shall be able to display 25 interactive points and custom text.

K. Operator shall be able to, through keyboard interface, disable any control logic for any output or setpoint, temporarily substitute the value for any input/output, and introduce a different value or state for all inputs, outputs and setpoints.

L. Individual controllers shall be programmed with nonvolatile stand-alone control logic necessary to maintain appropriate HVAC equipment operation. While in temporary stand-alone mode, energy efficiency can be sacrificed to maintain temperature control and operational conditions that will not damage equipment or compromise health and safety.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 14 December 15, 2017 M. Controllers shall, upon loss of valid programming, be capable of requesting and receiving a programming download of all required program code from the system management server.

N. Government personnel shall be able to create and modify control software in any facility computer utilizing menu-driven programming. Government personnel shall be able to store the programming on a removable computer disk and preprogram a nonvolatile, transportable memory storage device, which can be used for replacement of the programming in system controllers.

2.4 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE

A. The BAS shall consist of a network of controllers providing full stand-alone operation of the building. The controllers shall contain the necessary programming to accomplish the sequence of operations for building control.

B. Controllers shall normally execute the control strategy to use peer-to-peer communication capabilities. Upon loss of communication, the stand-alone control unit shall be able to execute its own stand-alone programming. This distribution of control authority is mandated so that the lost communications capability shall not cause a complete loss of control for affected systems.

C. Operator station shall not be necessary to sustain building operation.

D. Remote monitoring locations without LAN/WAN connectivity shall be monitored using remote I/O radio technology. All remote I/O will operate on a slave radio and send their data back to the master radio. Any additional remote I/O locations or additional points will require BACnet controller spare point capacity at the location of the master radio. If spare capacity is unavailable, an additional BACnet controller will be necessary at the master radio location to accept the expanded remote radio I/O. See this Section for information on spare point capacity of controllers.

E. All BAS equipment installed in this project shall be interoperable to interface with the existing campus BAS. All control products provided for this project shall comprise a BACnet internetwork.

F. The Contractor shall provide all communication media, connectors, repeaters, hubs, and routers necessary for the internetwork.

G. All controllers shall have a communication port for connections with the operator interfaces using the BACnet Data Link/Physical layer protocol.

H. Communication services over the internetwork shall result in operator interface and value passing that is transparent to the internetwork architecture as follows: 1. Connection of an operator interface device to any one controller on the internetwork will allow the operator to interface with all other controllers as if that interface were directly connected to the other controllers. Data, status information, reports, system software, custom programs, etc., for all controllers shall be available for viewing and editing from any one controller on the internetwork. 2. All database values (e.g., objects, software variables, custom program variables) of any one controller shall be readable by any other controller on the internetwork. This value passing shall be automatically performed by a controller when a reference to a object name not located in that controller is entered into the controller's database. An operator/installer shall

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 15 December 15, 2017 not be required to set up any communication services to perform internetwork value passing.

I. Dedicated Controllers: All sensing points and controlled outputs associated with a sub-system or piece of equipment shall be wired to and processed within one controller. A sub-system is defined as a group of equipment items that are directly controlled together, such as the components associated with an air handler. A “reset” signal may come from another subsystem controller. When supply terminal units are to be tracked by an exhaust terminal unit, all supply and exhaust monitoring and control points shall be processed by the same controller.

2.5 GRAPHICS

A. General: Provide complete graphics for all systems. Graphic completeness, appearance and quality shall be the best available from the approved manufacturer. All system shall be diagrammed in the graphics with measured values indicated at the appropriate location on the diagrammatic graphic. Setpoint, on-off-auto and similar adjustable shall be at the appropriate location on the diagrammatic graphic.

B. Graphic display requirements: 1. Provide a Microsoft Windows-based software package for the preparation of system graphics. 2. Include with this software a library of HVAC symbols such as fans, pumps, chillers, etc. 3. This section establishes standards for graphic displays as follows: a. All operator stations shall be programmed to display dynamic color graphic representations of the mechanical systems and floor areas for which this system has control. b. Systems to be displayed include the air handlers (including all monitored and controlled components), air terminal units, fans, chillers and towers, heat converters and exchangers, pumping systems and similar mechanical devices. c. Show the mechanical equipment components on a single graphic. Example: Chilled and condenser water pumps, cooling towers, chillers, differential pressure control valves, etc. d. Displays shall automatically update with current real-time data. e. Room floor plan displays are required and shall indicate the approximate positions of controlled mechanical system elements. f. All displays shall show real time data to include temperatures, actuator positions, and motor run status. g. All system input, output and setpoint points shall be displayed on an appropriate graphic.

2.6 BAS EQUIPMENT

A. GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE 1. Local Access: Operator interface with the installed BAS equipment and the entire campus BAS shall be performed with portable computers and desktop computers using site licensed software.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 16 December 15, 2017 2. WEB Access: It shall be possible to interface with the BAS from remote computers equipped with Microsoft Internet Explorer (web browser) via the Internet. a. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™. Systems requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client machine, or manufacture-specific browsers shall not be acceptable. b. System shall be an open, interoperable system supporting BACnet® and/or other protocols. c. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web browser to function with the BAS, shall not be acceptable. d. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted. 3. Operator interface with the BAS includes the ability to operate and program all campus BAS equipment. The ability to look, adjust/override and program will be controlled using access levels. 4. Overall management of the BAS, storage of programs, data, trends, access control, graphics. 5. Remote alarm notification services via cellular phone services that initiate a text message (SMS) on receipt of email message 6. Application Software: a. I/O capability from operator station. b. System security for each operator via software password and access levels. c. Automatic system diagnostics; monitor system and report failures. d. Database creation and support. e. Automatic and manual database save and restore. f. Dynamic color graphic displays with up to 10 screen displays at once. g. Custom graphics generation and graphics library of HVAC equipment and symbols. h. Alarm processing, messages, and reactions. i. Trend logs retrievable in spreadsheets and database programs. j. Alarm and event processing. k. Object and property status and control. l. Automatic restart of field equipment on restoration of power. m. Data collection, reports, and logs. Include standard reports for the following: 1) Current values of all objects. 2) Current alarm summary.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 17 December 15, 2017 3) Disabled objects. 4) Alarm lockout objects. 5) Logs. n. Custom report development. o. Utility and weather reports. p. Workstation application editors for controllers and schedules. q. Maintenance management. 7. Custom Application Software: a. English language oriented. b. Full-screen character editor/programming environment. c. Allow development of independently executing program modules with debugging/simulation capability. d. Support conditional statements. e. Support floating-point arithmetic with mathematic functions. f. Contains predefined time variables.

B. Control Units: Modular BACnet Controller, comprising of processor board with programmable, nonvolatile, random-access memory; local operator access and display panel; integral interface equipment; and backup power source. 1. All BACnet control units must be marked with BTL (BACnet Testing Laboratories) having obtained BTL listing for product by manufacturer or a BTL Certificate of Performance document. 2. All controllers with physical I/O shall have a spare point capacity of 25% for each Analog Input, Analog Output, Digital Input, or Digital Output. 3. Units monitor or control each I/O point; process information; execute commands from other control units, devices, and operator stations; and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 4. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. d. Software applications, scheduling, and alarm processing. e. Testing and developing control algorithms without disrupting field hardware and controlled environment. 5. Standard Application Programs: a. Coordinate 6. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 18 December 15, 2017 C. Local Control Units: Modular BACnet Controller, comprising of processor board with electronically programmable, nonvolatile, read-only memory; and backup power source. 1. All local control units must be marked with BTL (BACnet Testing Laboratories) having obtained BTL listing for product by manufacturer or a BTL Certificate of Performance document. 2. All controllers with physical I/O shall have a spare point capacity of 25% for each Analog Input, Analog Output, Digital Input, or Digital Output. 3. Units monitor or control each I/O point, process information, and download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit. 4. Stand-alone mode control functions operate regardless of network status. Functions include the following: a. Global communications. b. Discrete/digital, analog, and pulse I/O. c. Monitoring, controlling, or addressing data points. 5. Local operator interface provides for download from or upload to operator workstation or diagnostic terminal unit.

D. I/O Interface: Hardwired inputs and outputs may tie into system through controllers. Protect points so that shorting will cause no damage to controllers. 1. Binary Inputs: Allow monitoring of on-off signals without external power. 2. Pulse Accumulation Inputs: Accept up to 10 pulses per second. 3. Analog Inputs: Allow monitoring of low-voltage (0- to 10-V dc), current (4 to 20 mA), or resistance signals. 4. Binary Outputs: Provide on-off or pulsed low-voltage signal, selectable for normally open or normally closed operation. 5. Analog Outputs: Provide modulating signal, either low voltage (0- to 10-V dc) or current (four to 20 Ma). 6. Tri-State Outputs: Provide two coordinated binary outputs for control of three-point, floating-type electronic actuators. 7. Universal I/Os: Provide software selectable binary or analog outputs.

E. Power Supplies: Transformers with Class 2 current-limiting type or overcurrent protection; limit connected loads to 80 percent of rated capacity. DC power supply shall match output current and voltage requirements and be full-wave rectifier type with the following: 1. Output ripple of 5.0 mV maximum peak to peak. 2. Combined one percent line and load regulation with 100-mic.sec. response time for 50 percent load changes. 3. Built-in overvoltage and overcurrent protection and be able to withstand 150 percent overload for at least three seconds without failure.

F. Power Line Filtering: Internal or external transient voltage and surge suppression for workstations or controllers with the following:

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 19 December 15, 2017 1. Minimum dielectric strength of 1000 V. 2. Maximum response time of 10 nanoseconds. 3. Minimum transverse-mode noise attenuation of 65 dB. 4. Minimum common-mode noise attenuation of 150 dB at 40 to 100 Hz.

2.7 JAVA APPLICATION CONTROL ENGINE (JACE)

A. The Contractor shall supply one or more Java Application Control Engine (JACE) as part of this contract. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to properly select the number of devices needed based on their system design and limitations.

B. The Java Application Control Engine (JACE) shall provide the interface between the LAN or WAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices connected to the JACE. It shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide: 1. Calendar functions 2. Scheduling 3. Trending 4. Alarm monitoring and routing 5. Time synchronization 6. Integration of BACnet controller data, and any device connected through an optional software driver installed in the JACE

C. The Java Application Control Engine (Jace 403 I/O version) must provide the following hardware features as a minimum: 1. One Ethernet Port – 10/100 Mbps 2. One RS-232 port 3. One RS-485 port (electrically isolated) 4. Direct on board I/O with six universal inputs (Thermistor, current, voltage, dry contact, fast input contact) and 4 digital relay outputs. 5. Optional auto-dial/answer 56K modem 6. Battery Backup 7. Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity) 8. The JACE must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 32 to 122°F 9. The JACE must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0 and 158°F 10. The JACE must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 95% RH, non- condensing

D. The Java Application Control Engine (Jace 545 multi-port version)) must provide the following hardware features as a minimum:

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 20 December 15, 2017 1. One Ethernet Port – 10/100 Mbps 2. Two RS-232 ports 3. Four RS-485 ports (electrically isolated) 4. Optional auto-dial/answer 56K modem 5. Battery Backup 6. Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity) 7. The JACE must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 32 to 122°F 8. The JACE must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0 and 158°F 9. The JACE must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 95% RH, non- condensing

E. The JACE shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 32 simultaneous users.

F. Event Alarm Notification and actions 1. The JACE shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers. 2. The JACE shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up telephone connection, or wide-area network. 3. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but limited to: a. To alarm b. Return to normal c. To fault 4. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc. 5. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node. 6. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate password control.

G. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated.

H. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user: 1. Screen message text 2. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to route and email alarms based on: a. Day of week b. Time of day

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 21 December 15, 2017 c. Recipient 3. Pagers via paging services that initiate a page on receipt of email message 4. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s) 5. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer

I. The following shall be recorded by the JACE for each alarm (at a minimum): 1. Time and date 2. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.) 3. Equipment (air handler #, accessway, etc.) 4. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement. 5. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.

J. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that purpose.

K. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or classes of alarms defined by the user.

L. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the JACE and/or a server (if configured in the system) and shall be available for review by the user.

M. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters.

N. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided and available for review by the user.

O. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available for review by the user.

P. The JACE shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store this data for future use.

Q. The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the JACE that shall have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties: 1. Designating the log as interval or deviation. 2. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and the sample collection interval. 3. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to a fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object. 4. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the log and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out basis. 5. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a user- defined event or action.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 22 December 15, 2017 R. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the JACE and the data shall be accessed from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web browser.

S. All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using standard SQL statements.

T. All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats: 1. HTML 2. XML 3. Plain Text 4. Comma or tab separated values

U. Systems that do not provide log data in HTML and XML formats at a minimum shall not be acceptable.

V. The JACE shall have the ability to archive its log data either locally (to itself), or remotely to a server or other JACE on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following archiving properties, at a minimum: 1. Archive on time of day 2. Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size) 3. Archive when log has reached it’s user-defined capacity of data stores 4. Provide ability to clear logs once archived

2.8 OBJECT LIBRARIES

A. A standard library of objects shall be included for development and setup of application logic, user interface displays, system services, and communication networks.

B. The objects in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into the user’s database and shall be organized according to their function. In addition, the user shall have the capability to group objects created in their application and store the new instances of these objects in a user- defined library.

C. In addition to the standard libraries specified here, the supplier of the system shall maintain an on-line accessible (over the Internet) library, available to all registered users to provide new or updated objects and applications as they are developed.

D. All control objects shall conform to the control objects specified in the BACnet specification and each independent hardware using these control objects must be marked with BTL (BACnet Testing Laboratories) having obtained BTL listing for product by manufacturer or a BTL Certificate of Performance document.

E. The library shall include applications or objects for the following functions, at a minimum: 1. Scheduling Object. The schedule must conform to the schedule object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 7-day plus holiday & temporary scheduling features and a minimum of 10 on/off events per day. Data entry to be by graphical sliders to speed creation and selection of on-off events.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 23 December 15, 2017 2. Calendar Object. The calendar must conform to the calendar object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 12-month calendar features to allow for holiday or special event data entry. Data entry to be by graphical “point-and-click” selection. This object must be “linkable” to any or all scheduling objects for effective event control. 3. Duty Cycling Object. Provide a universal duty cycle object to allow repetitive on/off time control of equipment as an energy conserving measure. Any number of these objects may be created to control equipment at varying intervals 4. Temperature Override Object. Provide a temperature override object that is capable of overriding equipment turned off by other energy saving programs (scheduling, duty cycling etc.) to maintain occupant comfort or for equipment freeze protection. 5. Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization object to provide the capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also, allow equipment to be stopped before the scheduled un-occupancy time just far enough ahead to take advantage of the building’s “flywheel” effect for energy savings. Provide automatic tuning of all start / stop time object properties based on the previous day’s performance. 6. Demand Limiting Object. Provide a comprehensive demand-limiting object that is capable of controlling demand for any selected energy utility (electric, oil, and gas). The object shall provide the capability of monitoring a demand value and predicting (by use of a sliding window prediction algorithm) the demand at the end of the user defined interval period (1-60 minutes). This object shall also accommodate a utility meter time sync pulse for fixed interval demand control. Upon a prediction that will exceed the user defined demand limit (supply a minimum of 6 per day), the demand limiting object shall issue shed commands to either turn off user specified loads or modify equipment set points to effect the desired energy reduction. If the list of shed-able equipment is not enough to reduce the demand to below the set point, a message shall be displayed on the users screen (as an alarm) instructing the user to take manual actions to maintain the desired demand. The shed lists are specified by the user and shall be selectable to be shed in either a fixed or rotating order to control which equipment is shed the most often. Upon suitable reductions in demand, the demand-limiting object shall restore the equipment that was shed in the reverse order in which it was shed. Each sheddable object shall have a minimum and maximum shed time property to effect both equipment protection and occupant comfort.

F. The library shall include control objects for the following functions. All control objects shall conform to the objects as specified in the BACnet specification. 1. Analog Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Allow high, low and failure limits to be assigned for alarming. Also, provide a time delay filter property to prevent nuisance alarms caused by temporary excursions above or below the user defined alarm limits. 2. Analog Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. 3. Binary Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. The user must be able to specify either input condition for alarming. This object must also include the capability to record equipment run-time by counting the amount of time the hardware input is in an “on” condition. The user must be able to specify either input condition as the “on” condition.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 24 December 15, 2017 4. Binary Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Properties to enable minimum on and off times for equipment protection as well as interstart delay must be provided. The BACnet Command Prioritization priority scheme shall be incorporated to allow multiple control applications to execute commands on this object with the highest priority command being invoked. Provide sixteen levels of priority as a minimum. Systems not employing the BACnet method of contention resolution shall not be acceptable. 5. PID Control Loop Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Each individual property must be adjustable as well as to be disabled to allow proportional control only, or proportional with integral control, as well as proportional, integral and derivative control. 6. Comparison Object - Allow a minimum of two analog objects to be compared to select either the highest, lowest, or equality between the two linked inputs. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation. 7. Math Object - Allow a minimum of four analog objects to be tested for the minimum or maximum, or the sum, difference, or average of linked objects. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation. 8. Custom Programming Objects - Provide a blank object template for the creation of new custom objects to meet specific user application requirements. This object must provide a simple BASIC-like programming language that is used to define object behavior. Provide a library of functions including math and logic functions, string manipulation, and e-mail as a minimum. Also, provide a comprehensive on-line debug tool to allow complete testing of the new object. Allow new objects to be stored in the library for re-use. 9. Interlock Object - Provide an interlock object that provides a means of coordination of objects within a piece of equipment such as an Air Handler or other similar types of equipment. An example is to link the return fan to the supply fan such that when the supply fan is started, the return fan object is also started automatically without the user having to issue separate commands or to link each object to a schedule object. In addition, the control loops, damper objects, and alarm monitoring (such as return air, supply air, and mixed air temperature objects) will be inhibited from alarming during a user-defined period after startup to allow for stabilization. When the air handler is stopped, the interlocked return fan is also stopped, the outside air damper is closed, and other related objects within the air handler unit are inhibited from alarming thereby eliminating nuisance alarms during the off period. 10. Temperature Override Object - Provide an object whose purpose is to provide the capability of overriding a binary output to an “On” state in the event a user specified high or low limit value is exceeded. This object is to be linked to the desired binary output object as well as to an analog object for temperature monitoring, to cause the override to be enabled. This object will execute a Start command at the Temperature Override level of start/stop command priority unless changed by the user. 11. Composite Object - Provide a container object that allows a collection of objects representing an application to be encapsulated to protect the application from tampering, or to more easily represent large applications. This object must have the ability to allow the user to select the appropriate parameters of the “contained” application that are represented on the graphical shell of this container.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 25 December 15, 2017 G. The object library shall include objects to support the integration of devices connected to the Java Application Control Engine (JACE). At a minimum, provide the following as part of the standard library included with the programming software: 1. For BACnet devices, provide the following objects at a minimum: a. Analog In b. Analog Out c. Analog Value d. Binary e. Binary In f. Binary Out g. Binary Value h. Multi-State In i. Multi-State Out j. Multi-State Value k. Schedule Export l. Calendar Export m. Trend Export n. Device 2. For each BACnet object, provide the ability to assign the object a BACnet device and object instance number. 3. For BACnet devices, provide the following support at a minimum a. Segmentation b. Segmented Request c. Segmented Response d. Application Services e. Read Property f. Read Property Multiple g. Write Property h. Write Property Multiple i. Confirmed Event Notification j. Unconfirmed Event Notification k. Acknowledge Alarm l. Get Alarm Summary m. Who-has n. I-have o. Who-is

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 26 December 15, 2017 p. I-am q. Subscribe COV r. Confirmed COV notification s. Unconfirmed COV notification t. Media Types u. Ethernet v. BACnet IP Annex J w. MSTP x. BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) function y. Routing

2.9 ALARM PANELS

A. Unitized cabinet with suitable brackets for wall or floor mounting. Fabricate of 0.06-inch- (1.5- mm-) thick, furniture-quality steel or extruded-aluminum alloy, totally enclosed, with hinged doors and keyed lock and with manufacturer's standard shop-painted finish.

B. Indicating light for each alarm point, single horn, acknowledge switch, and test switch, mounted on hinged cover. 1. Alarm Condition: Indicating light flashes and horn sounds. 2. Acknowledge Switch: Horn is silent and indicating light is steady. 3. Second Alarm: Horn sounds and indicating light is steady. 4. Alarm Condition Cleared: System is reset and indicating light is extinguished. 5. Contacts in alarm panel allow remote monitoring by independent alarm company.

2.10 ALARM PROGRAM

A. For each alarm input, provide the following assignable alarm responses: 1. Display English language point description in addition to system point identification. 2. Print out alarm description and operator-created alarm message. 3. Require acknowledgment by operator and print occurrence if directed by Government.

2.11 LOGS

A. Trend log: Trend log point data shall be available in the online database of the BAS master server for a minimum of 1 year. Provide the ability to archive the log from any JACE to the BAS master server. As a minimum, provide capacity for 50 Trend point logs on the JACE to be held until collected at the BAS master server. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based on time or when the Trend log has reached is user-defined buffer size to prevent Trend data loss. Trend log data shall be viewable on a monitor and report sent to a printer. Each Trend log shall have assignable start/stop times/dates. Trend logs shall have ability to be scheduled and archived. For each log entry, at minimum provide the following data:

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 27 December 15, 2017 1. Time and date 2. BAS system point name 3. Alarm minimum, maximum values 4. Present value 5. Alarm acknowledgement time by operator. 6. Alarm acknowledgement by operator account identification.

B. Current alarm log: Display all points currently in alarm.

C. Operator activity log: Record operator activity by operator account identification and work performed for a minimum of 1 year. For each log entry, at minimum provide the following data: 1. Time and date 2. Operator account identification 3. Niagara station identification 4. Niagara station application information

D. Audit log: Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the JACE. Audit log data shall be available in the online database of the BAS master server for a minimum of 1 year. Provide the ability to archive the log from any JACE to the BAS master server. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based on time or when the log has reached is user-defined buffer size. For each log entry, at minimum provide the following data: 1. Time and date 2. Operator account identification. 3. Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc.

2.12 FAILURE MODE

A. Upon failure of any BACnet controller, the operator station shall display off-line occurrence for each affected point, and provide communication verification to each controller for each I/O channel.

B. In the event of communication failure, controller shall continue to operate equipment using appropriate backup values for missing global information. If sensor information is necessary for proper stand-alone function, then that sensor shall be attached directly to the appropriate controller. Provide failure mode programming to accomplish safe operation of equipment in case of communications failure on local trunk.

C. Upon return of primary power after a power failure of up to 72 hours, the system shall automatically return to completely normal operation with no action required from operating personnel.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 28 December 15, 2017 2.13 DATABASE BACKUP AND STORAGE

A. The BAS master server shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The database shall be backed up based on a user-defined time interval. The backup shall have the ability to be directed to another network storage device or server.

B. The JACE shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The database shall be backed up based on a user-defined time interval.

C. Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be stored in the JACE. The age of the most recently saved database is dependent on the user-defined database save interval.

D. The JACE database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user viewing and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML format is supported.

2.14 ENERGY REDUCTION AND SPECIAL OPERATION SOFTWARE

A. The system shall be capable of controlling energy-consuming loads by the following energy reduction software: 1. Time schedules: Software should provide at least 16 time schedules. Each schedule is to be an 8-day type, capable of six entries minimum per day. Time program shall provide ON/OFF commands, and reset SETPOINT capabilities. 2. Holiday time programs: Provide a holiday time schedule capability. 3. Optimal start/stop: Provide the ability to optimize start/stop times to attain and maintain temperature setpoint only during occupied times. The system shall be self tuning, with compensation for weekends and holidays. 4. Setpoint reset: Provide a means of automatically resetting heating water, chilled water and ventilation air temperatures, volumes and pressures. 5. Provide a program to automatically restart all BAS controlled equipment upon the resumption of power or return from fire alarm condition. Equipment shall be restarted according to a prearranged, prioritized and staggered restart schedule. 6. For loads that have been turned off at the Motor Control Center, either by positioning of the HOA switch or the line disconnect; provide a restart strategy that automatically restarts load upon the reset of switches to their normal on-line positions. 7. Provide capability to adjust the setpoints of main mechanical systems from an operator station using simple ‘point and click’ command windows.

2.15 RADIO REMOTE I/O DATA SYSTEM 1. 900 Mhz wireless input-output transmission system, up to 250 stations, up to 32 input/output modules per wireless station, license free, frequency-hopping, self-healing, mesh network technology. Manufacturer Schneider Electric Radioline or approved equal. 2. Design, component selection, panel shop, installation, custom programming, documentation, testing, training and warranty service shall be the direct responsibility of the Prime Contractor.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 29 December 15, 2017 3. Provide all necessary power supplies, transceivers, input/output devices, antennas, antenna cabling, surge protection and enclosures. 4. New radio equipment and software shall be selected for compatibility with systems that are presently installed at the site upon any future phase of the project.

2.16 ELECTRONIC SENSORS

A. Temperature sensors: 1. Sensors shall be completely pre-calibrated with no electrical adjustments or calibration required for standard installation conditions. 2. The temperature displayed at an operator station shall be accurate to within 1º F. This accuracy shall be warranted (parts and labor) for a minimum of three years. 3. Wall-mounted sensors for monitoring only shall be tamperproof, temperature sensing only, linear output 4 to 20 ma. 4. Surface-mount pipe sensors (strap on style) shall be 1k Ohm RTD. Range -40 to 240  F, and 2x4 metal box to attach to pipe with nylon straps (included). Manufacturer: Siemens or approved equal.

B. Current sensors shall convert AC to proportional DC (4 to 20 ma). Response time: 300 milliseconds to 99% of final value. Manufacturer: Neilson-Kuljian or approved equal.

C. Averaging elements shall be mounted so as to cross a minimum of 80% of the plenum width and shall be located to provide an indication of temperature within +/- 1 F. Provide support at 36 inches maximum such that there will be no metal to metal contact between the sensing element and other equipment. For hospital and laboratories projects. Delete if not applicable.

D. Pressure Transmitters/Transducers: 1. Water Pressure Transducers: Stainless-steel diaphragm construction, suitable for service; range 0 to 100-psig operating pressure; linear output 4 to 20 mA. Manufacturer: Barksdale or approved equal.

2.17 STATUS SENSORS

A. 3 Phase Monitor: Three-phase monitor, True RMS, Voltage range 190 – 500V, phase reversal monitoring when phase out of rotation, undervoltage adjustable from 80 to 95%, overvoltage at 110%, phase unbalance adjustable from 2 to 10%. Manufacturer: Macromatic PMD Series or approved equal.

B. Current Switches: Self-powered, solid-state with adjustable trip current, selected to match current and system output requirements.

2.18 ENCLOSURES

A. All enclosures to be NEMA 1, unless otherwise required for intended service. NEMA 4X enclosures 14-gauge, SS Type 304 or 316L must be provided for all outdoor locations. All controls and instruments shall be logically assembled at one or more panels, have hinged doors and be marked with engraved melamine labels.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 30 December 15, 2017 B. All enclosures used as a mounting site for control devices shall also contain a documentation holder located on the inside of the door.

C. All enclosures shall be provided with locks.

D. Label each equipment panel furnished with 120 VAC power with power source label showing identification of power panel and breaker.

E. All enclosures shall be equipped with a 120VAC plug convenience outlet.

2.19 WIRING AND CONDUIT

A. Install wiring and conduit in accordance with Division 26 requirements.

B. Minimum wire size shall be based on the manufacturer’s recommendations based on the specific application. Single conductor wire insulation shall be THHN. All wires shall be sized in accordance with the NEC for the load serviced. A single conductor shall not be used for more than one leg of an input or output device circuit (no “common” conductors) unless approved by Government.

C. All wiring shall be stranded. Exceptions will be made for wiring used in preassembled factory crimped cables, 20 g and smaller, where connectors provide support to the insulated cable jacket at the point of connection.

D. All low voltage energy limited wiring (except 24 VAC power), installed in open tray or installed as open wiring, shall be in jacketed cables dedicated to individual devices.

E. Junction box covers shall be labeled “BAS” or show the vendor logo.

F. Splicing shall be minimized and shall be done only in accessible outlet, junction, or cabinet boxes that are clearly shown on the “as-built” record drawings. Splicing shall be made with 3M “Scotchloc” spring connectors with steel cap and PVC insulation, Thomas & Betts, or a crimp on butt-splice, or approved equal. When splicing is necessary, the insulation colors shall match and the conductors shall be mechanically secured to each other so that no stress is applied to the splice. Splicing of long runs shall be accomplished by means of a fully insulated crimped barrel connector.

G. Wire pulls by powered mechanical means will not be permitted. Conduit shall be cleaned of foreign material just before pulling the wire or cable. Lubricants shall be compounds specifically prepared for cable pulling and shall not contain petroleum or other products that will affect cable insulation.

H. Wire that has scrapes, nicks, gouges, or crushed insulation shall not be used and shall be removed when present.

I. Groups of conductors, where installed in cabinets and wire trays, shall be neatly grouped with wire ties or equal.

J. All wiring contained in metal wireways shall be in wireways dedicated to low voltage service.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 31 December 15, 2017 K. Low voltage energy-limited wiring shall not be run in the same wireways with, or closely parallel to, high voltage or switched power wiring. Interposing relays shall be used for all switched power loads and shall be located so that the switched power conductors do not run in the same wireway as the interposing relay coil power or any other energy-limited low voltage conductors.

L. All wire shall be new and brought on the jobsite in original packages bearing Underwriter’s label and the date of manufacture.

M. Aluminum wire is prohibited.

N. No conduit shall be filled so that the maximum bundled cross-sectional dimension exceeds 40 % of conduit inside diameter. No raceway shall be filled to more than 40% and maximum fill for “wiremold” (surface raceway) shall be 20%.

O. No wire run or circuit shall be longer than 80% of the maximum allowable length or power consumption for the wire size and application. No output circuit shall exceed 80% of the maximum load capacity specified by the manufacturer.

P. Wiring and conduit shall comply with Division 26 specifications. 1. The basic wiring method shall be in conduit unless otherwise permitted in this section. 2. Where conduit direct connection is not possible, all permitted open wiring shall be plenum rated. 3. Permitted open wiring is limited to the following applications: a. Wiring from a zone airflow control unit to a nearby temperature sensor not to exceed 50 feet. b. Wiring from a zone airflow terminal control unit to a nearby water control valve not to exceed six feet.

Q. Wiring from any controller to a device which has otherwise been approved for installation and cannot accept conduit connection shall meet the following requirements: 1. Conduit shall be used to within 12 inches of the device. 2. Install in wireway all trunk communication wiring between the operator station and the controllers, and between controllers. Open wiring is not otherwise permitted.

R. Conduits shall be provided with appropriate bushings and end fittings to protect cabling from sharp conduit edges.

S. Conduit size shall be ¾-inch minimum for all wiring groups consisting of six or more conductors. NEC requirements shall apply as though conductors were used to their full current carrying and thermal capacity.

T. Wireway runs shall be level, plumb, parallel or perpendicular to walls, pipes and sides of openings. Wireways shall follow the contours of the support surface. Passageways for access and servicing shall not be blocked.

U. All wiring between BACnet controllers and trunk, N2 and LAN cables longer than 300 feet shall be 100% backed up with spare conductors.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 32 December 15, 2017 V. All conductors that become bundled or pass from an enclosure shall be identified with typed or machine lettered labels, Briade or approved equal. Tag numbers shall agree with wire numbers assigned on wiring diagrams and the installation drawings.

W. Wires shall be labeled with mechanically prepared labels at their connection point to each apparatus point of connection.

X. UL/ULC Listed Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 3 feet in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may be used within partition walls and for final connection to equipment.

Y. Open wiring, when permitted, shall be installed in compliance with WAC 296-46-725 with reference to NEC 336-15 and shall also be installed as follows: 1. All open wiring that penetrates through walls and crosses structural ceilings shall do so within 18 inches of the structural ceiling surface. 2. Wiring shall be attached to vertical supports at attachment points prepared by a protective wrap of electrical tape around the support. This wrap shall create a surface free of sharp edges. 3. Absolutely no wire is to be attached to pipe work or conduit of any kind. 4. Wire ties, if used, shall be trimmed so as to reduce sharp edges. 5. The vendor shall provide required cabling attachment points for control’s use if the ceiling structure does not provide acceptable attachment points.

2.20 CONTROL RELAYS

A. Panel relays shall be plug-in type with contacts rated at twice the amperage rating of circuit requirements: Minimum temperature range –25º C to +70º C. Enclosure: Clear dust cover and shock resistant, rated for minimum of 2.5 million mechanical operations and 100,000 electrical operations at full load.

B. Remote/interposing relays shall be used for all remote switched loads. 1. They shall be housed in a NEMA-rated enclosure. Where two or more relays are mounted in the same enclosure, provide a hinged cover. 2. Besides meeting panel relay requirements, relays shall have 24 VDC coils and form C dry contacts with a minimum rating of 5 amperes @ 240 VAC. 3. Relays controlling inductive loads shall be equipped with coil transient suppression devices to limit transients to 150% of rated coil voltage.

2.21 TRANSFORMERS

A. 120V AC to 24V AC transformers shall be supplied to provide control voltage to the control system. The incoming 120V AC power shall be fused. Transformers shall be supplied with suitable mounting plates and mounted in separate electrical panel boxes with hinged covers adjacent to control system panels.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 33 December 15, 2017 2.22 SPARE PARTS

A. Replacement Materials: Provide one replacement for each unique controller, damper motor, valve motor, thermostat, relay, etc.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS.

A. General: All work under this section shall be performed by the Prime Contractor or by their qualified controls sub-contractor.

B. Patching and painting required for the control system installation will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

C. Patching and repairing penetrations in fire-rated walls with penetration firestopping will be the responsibility of the Contractor.

D. Install software in control units and operator workstation(s). Implement all features of programs to specified requirements and as appropriate to sequence of operation.

E. Notations at Instruments: A typewritten notation shall be provided at each instrument stating its use; at thermostats, the proper setting. In finished spaces these notations shall be secured to the inside of the case; in other areas, shall be secured by adhesive to the duct or other adjacent surface and shellacked over. Instruments and equipment, whose use is self-evident, such as ordinary room thermostats, radiator valves, or similar unitary equipment valves, will not require such notations.

F. Radio Antennas: Antennas shall be properly secured according to manufacturer’s instructions utilizing manufacturer supplied installation brackets and fasteners. Yagi antennas must be aligned such that they point toward the Water Tower Omni-directional antenna to achieve the strongest possible signal strength. Consult the manufacturers radio configuration and antenna alignment procedures. Provide proper lightening protection and grounding for any antenna per manufacturer’s installation instructions.

G. Existing Piped Hydronic Systems: Provide Surface Mount (Strap on) Pipe Sensors for retrofit applications on existing piped systems in which system could not be isolated, drained partially or interrupt operation. All sensing bulbs must be in direct contact with pipe, tightly secured, and insulated. During retrofit, repair any insulation disturbed for sensor installation. Service box to be secured with straps to pipe. Wrap excess wire lead to sensor bulb around outside of pipe beneath any pipe insulation.

H. Wall mounted temperature sensors shall be mounted on electrical boxes, and all wire penetrations shall be sealed to prevent thermal convection.

I. All devices shall be mounted within enclosures. Cable trays and external cabinet surfaces shall not be used as mounting surfaces.

J. Proof of run for both fans and pumps shall be by current sensing devices rather than differential pressure switches.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 34 December 15, 2017 K. All pressure indicating/measuring devices shall be installed with capped tee devices to permit attachment of test meters.

L. Controls Mounting: Controls shall be grouped by systems, areas, or other appropriate basis concealed in locking-type wall-mounted cabinets, with proper labeling as to functions and settings marked on the front thereof, located no more than 6'-0" above the floor unless specifically approved by Government. Control cabinets shall not be installed on ductwork or plenum walls. Mount all relays, switches, contacts, etc., in common panels. Tag each instrument by use of approved labels corresponding to symbols used on control drawings.

M. Spare Points: All controllers with physical I/O shall have a spare point capacity of 25% for each Analog Input, Analog Output, Digital Input, or Digital Output.

N. Location of Room Sensors: Where sensors are mounted at light switches, locate on centerline of the electrical outlet box, as directed. Sensors shall not be located above dimmer switches. Exact location of sensors shall be verified with final casework and furniture layouts.

O. Verify location of thermostats, CO2 sensors and other exposed control sensors with Drawings and room details before installation. Install devices 48 inches above the floor. Install averaging elements in ducts and plenums in crossing or zigzag pattern.

P. Install guards on thermostats in the following locations: 1. Entrances. 2. Public areas.

3.2 CONTROL SOFTWARE PROGRAMMING

A. Control of equipment as described in the sequence of operations and shall include: 1. Time and holiday schedules 2. Alarm limits and histories 3. Summary of data for each zone 4. Trend logs and historical data 5. All setpoints 6. Master menu 7. Dynamic color graphic Interface

B. The following Points Descriptions and Sequences of Operation shall be enhanced as necessary and included as part of the control drawings to expand and clarify information shown in the drawings. 1. Points information shall be displayed and organized by system in dynamic graphic form at the operator stations. 2. The energy reduction software and miscellaneous functions shall manage all points. 3. It shall be possible to “disconnect” any output or setpoint from the AUTOMATIC control logic and enter a MANUAL value or state from any Operator Station. 4. It shall be possible to replace any input with a MANUAL value from any Operator Station.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 35 December 15, 2017 5. All control loop parameters for each loop shall be displayed on one display.

C. Where a point or device is indicated on a drawing, it shall be provided even if not required in a sequence of operation (sequence). Where a point or device is required for a sequence, it shall be provided even if it is not shown on a diagram or plan.

D. All setpoints indicated in the sequences are suggested initial setpoints. Actual setpoints shall be determined and programmed during system balancing and commissioning process. If actual setpoint determined during this process is substantially different from the initial suggested setpoint, request confirmation of acceptability from the A/E.

E. All setpoints and values indicated in the sequences shall be adjustable with authorized access. Government shall determine/confirm the appropriate access level during Government training. It shall be possible to have multiple access levels with limited range of adjustability for each level.

F. All sequences shall apply when the Operator (with proper access) allows automatic control via an Operators Station. It shall be possible to override to prevent automatic operation and take manual control of any system or equipment item. If automatic start-stop operation is not discussed in sequence for a particular device, then there shall be a manual “on-off” command feature at the Operators Station.

G. Displays: Every control device indicated on the drawings or specifications and every point required in the sequences of operation shall have information displayed at the Operators Station(s). All information displayed shall have a simple and concise description of what the information is and means. Certain display requirements are indicated in the sequences. To avoid unnecessary duplication, other more typical display requirements are not indicated in every sequence but shall be provided for every device or point as follows: 1. Every device or equipment item that has a start-stop, open-closed, on-off or similar binary output from the BAS shall have an operational status display. Display shall include multiple pieces of information, as follows: a. Current “on-off” condition as sensed by proof switch (where available). b. Virtual “on-off” condition if a proof switch is not available, but other sensors can provide a reasonable verification of equipment operation. For example, such a reasonable verification may include using an analog pressure sensor downstream of a fan where a sensed value above a certain level could only occur if the fan was in operation. 2. Every device or equipment item that has a binary (open-closed contact) input to the BAS shall have an operational status display. Display shall include: 3. Current condition. 4. Every device or equipment item that has an analog input to the BAS shall have an operational status display. Display shall include: a. Current measured condition. b. Whether alarm feature is active. c. Current setpoint for high and low alarm conditions. 5. Unless indicated otherwise in the sequences, all stated values shall be assumed to use units of measurement displayed (at operator workstations) as follows:

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 36 December 15, 2017 a. Temperature in degree F. b. Humidity in relative humidity (percent). c. Depth or level in feet. d. Air pressure (and differential pressure) in inches water column. e. Water or steam pressure (and differential pressure) in PSIG. f. Water flow rate in GPM. g. Air flow rate in CFM. h. Speed as percent of maximum RPM (when motor is driven at 60 hertz by VFD).

H. Graphics: Provide graphics package with the following requirements and details for the given scope of work outlined in the Contract Documents: 1. Provide a critical systems information graphic for entire base intended for security at the Guard Shack. A single screen organized in a tabular form by building identifying systems and indicating live point value information and present status if in an alarmed condition. All critical information for generators, Water Treatment System, Waste Water Treatment, Environmental Growth Chambers and greenhouses monitored shall be available on this graphic. 2. Provide an overall base property map graphic showing buildings and systems as they exist on the property. Links to specific building floor plans and systems will be navigated to from this graphic. Provide outside air temperature and humidity on this graphic. 3. Provide floor plan & mechanical yard graphic of each building identifying each space. Provide live point value information for temperatures monitored on the floor plan. 4. Provide system graphics for each system type being monitored. a. System graphics are a representation of one-line flow diagram accurately illustrating system equipment locations, piping, pumps, flows, etc. b. Provide live point value information for all points and place them according relevant portions of the system. c. System graphics need to be provided for any boilers, chillers, space temperatures and humidity, humidifiers, generators, automatic transfer switches (ATS), process water treatment systems, etc.; specialty rooms including clean rooms, etc.; and utility systems, including lift stations, potable water treatment facilities, wastewater treatment plant, sanitary sewer pre-treatment system, water tower, etc. d. Graphics for existing SCADA system should be duplicated. These graphics should be reviewed and documented prior to taking the existing SCADA off-line. Existing as- built documentation of MTU SCADA system is available upon request which may aid in graphics creation. 5. Enhanced monitor screen for facilities operations personnel similar guard shack graphic but with additional systems critical to Facilities.

I. Trending of Points: Provide trend log programming for collection at the Niagara Enterprise Server. All Digital points shall be configured for COV trending and all Analog points shall be configured for 10-minute interval trending. Trends of all points shall be available in the online database for a period of 1 year minimum.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 37 December 15, 2017 J. Alarms: Provide alarm programming and setup for all alarms specifically indicated in the sequences of operation, and at additional points as requested by the Government up to a maximum of 20% of all inputs provided on the project. Assign operator high and low alarm limits according to design data or as Government requests. It is assumed that Government will want alarms to be set up for all filter switches and at all inputs indicated, but not addressed in the sequences.

3.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING AND CONNECTION INSTALLATION

A. All electrical control wiring and terminations for the control system shall be provided by the Contractor.

B. All line voltage wiring required to perform the control scope of work shall be furnished and installed by the contractor contractor.

C. Install raceways, boxes, and cabinets according to Section 260533, "Raceway and Boxes for Electrical Systems."

D. Install building wire and cable according to Section 260519, "Low-Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables."

E. Install signal and communication cable according to Section 271500, "Communications Horizontal Cabling." 1. Conceal cable, except in mechanical rooms and areas where other conduit and piping are exposed. 2. Install exposed cable in raceway. 3. Install concealed cable in raceway. 4. Bundle and harness multiconductor instrument cable in place of single cables where several cables follow a common path. 5. Fasten flexible conductors, bridging cabinets and doors, along hinge side; protect against abrasion. Tie and support conductors. 6. Number-code or color-code conductors for future identification and service of control system, except local individual room control cables. 7. Install wire and cable with sufficient slack and flexible connections to allow for vibration of piping and equipment.

F. Install underground wire and cable according to Section 260543, “Underground Ducts and Raceways”

G. Connect manual-reset limit controls independent of manual-control switch positions. Automatic duct heater resets may be connected in interlock circuit of power controllers.

H. Connect hand-off-auto selector switches to override automatic interlock controls when switch is in hand position.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 38 December 15, 2017 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Manufacturer's Field Startup & Commissioning for controls: Engage a factory-authorized representative to inspect test, and adjust field-assembled components and equipment installation, including connections. Report results in writing and submit to Engineer and COR for approval.

B. Perform the following field tests and inspections and prepare test reports: 1. Operational Test: After electrical circuitry has been energized, start units to confirm proper unit operation. Remove and replace malfunctioning units and retest. 2. Test and adjust controls and safeties. 3. Test each point through its full operating range to verify that safety and operating control set points are as required. 4. Test each control loop to verify stable mode of operation and compliance with sequence of operation. Adjust PID actions. 5. Test each system for compliance with sequence of operation. 6. Test software and hardware interlocks.

C. BAS Verification: 1. Verify that instruments are installed before calibration, testing, and loop or leak checks. 2. Check instruments for proper location and accessibility. 3. Check instrument installation for direction of flow, elevation, orientation, insertion depth, and other applicable considerations. 4. Check instrument tubing for proper fittings, slope, material, and support. 5. Check installation of air supply for each instrument. 6. Check flow instruments. Inspect tag number and line and bore size, and verify that inlet side is identified and that meters are installed correctly. 7. Check pressure instruments, piping slope, installation of valve manifold, and self-contained pressure regulators. 8. Check temperature instruments and material and length of sensing elements. 9. Check control valves. Verify that they are in correct direction. 10. Check air-operated dampers. Verify that pressure gages are provided and that proper blade alignment, either parallel or opposed, has been provided. 11. Check BAS system as follows: a. Verify that BAS controller power supply is from emergency power supply, if applicable. b. Verify that wires at control panels are tagged with their service designation and approved tagging system. c. Verify that spare I/O capacity has been provided. d. Verify that BAS controllers are protected from power supply surges.

D. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and equipment and repeat testing procedures.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 39 December 15, 2017 3.5 ADJUSTING

A. Calibrating and Adjusting: 1. Calibrate instruments. 2. Make three-point calibration test for both linearity and accuracy for each analog instrument. 3. Calibrate equipment and procedures using manufacturer's written recommendations and instruction manuals. Use test equipment with accuracy at least double that of instrument being calibrated. 4. Control System Inputs and Outputs: a. Check analog inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Check analog outputs using milliampere meter at 0, 50, and 100 percent output. c. Check digital inputs using jumper wire. d. Check digital outputs using ohmmeter to test for contact making or breaking. e. Check resistance temperature inputs at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistant source. 5. Flow: a. Set differential pressure flow transmitters for 0 and 100 percent values with 3-point calibration accomplished at 50, 90, and 100 percent of span. b. Manually operate flow switches to verify that they make or break contact. 6. Pressure: a. Calibrate pressure transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span. b. Calibrate pressure switches to make or break contacts, with adjustable differential set at minimum. 7. Temperature: a. Calibrate resistance temperature transmitters at 0, 50, and 100 percent of span using a precision-resistance source. b. Calibrate temperature switches to make or break contacts. 8. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers without positioners, following the manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve or damper is 100 percent open and closed. 9. Stroke and adjust control valves and dampers with positioners, following manufacturer's recommended procedure, so that valve and damper is 0, 50, and 100 percent closed. 10. Provide diagnostic and test instruments for calibration and adjustment of system. 11. Provide written description of procedures and equipment for calibrating each type of instrument. Submit procedures review and approval before initiating startup procedures.

B. Adjust initial temperature and humidity set points.

C. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 12 months of date of Substantial Completion, provide on-site assistance in adjusting system to suit actual occupied conditions.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 40 December 15, 2017 3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE.

A. Engage a factory-authorized representative to train Government's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain instrumentation and controls. Refer to Division 01, Section 017900, "Demonstration and Training."

B. The building controls system contractor shall submit a proposed Acceptance Test Agreement for testing the system's functionality and the accuracy of all sensors and actuators.

C. The system installation shall be complete in all respects and tested for proper operation prior to acceptance testing for the Government. A letter shall be submitted to the Engineer and COR requesting system acceptance. This letter shall certify all controls are installed and the software programs have been completely exercised for proper equipment operation. Acceptance testing will commence at a mutually agreeable time within 30 calendar days of the request. When the system has been deemed satisfactory in whole or in part by the Government's representative, the system will be accepted for beneficial use which will start the warranty period for the commissioned portion.

END OF SECTION 230900

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 41 December 15, 2017

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 230900 - 42 December 15, 2017 SECTION 260500 – COMMON WORK RESULTS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. The work under this division includes furnishing all materials, equipment, labor, supervision, tools and items necessary for the construction, installation, connection, testing and operation of all electrical work for this project as shown on the electrical drawings specified herein.

B. Related Work Described Elsewhere: Where other divisions require electrical materials or installations, comply with all applicable requirements herein. Provide all electrical materials and installation work required to connect, test and operate equipment required by other divisions. Electrical installations required by other divisions but not shown on the electrical drawings shall be provided.

C. Warranty: The Contractor shall guarantee all work installed under this specification and make good, repair or replace at his own expense any defective work, materials or parts. Incandescent lamps are not warranted but all shall be operating at time of final acceptance.

1.3 REGULATIONS

A. Codes and Ordinances: Comply with all applicable codes, ordinances and regulations including the National Electrical Code, National Electrical Safety Code, NFPA and all other national, state and local codes and ordinances. Notify the Engineer of any noncompliance in contract documents to applicable codes and regulations prior to installation of the work. Changes in the work after initial installation due to requirements of code enforcing agencies shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.

B. Permits: Provide and pay for all permits and fees required for this project. In addition to paying for all permits and fees, the Contractor shall be responsible for contacting the various Approving Authorities, arranging for review of shop drawings where appropriate, scheduling inspections in a timely manner, and making necessary corrections as required by the Approving Authorities.

C. Approving Authority: It is the Contractor's responsibility to ascertain and contact the appropriate "Approving Authorities" for this project. Approving Authorities will include, but not be limited to the electrical inspector and the Fire Marshal having jurisdiction.

D. Certificate of Inspection: Obtain a Certificate of Electrical Inspection indicating final acceptance from the local inspecting authority.

E. Safety Measures To Be Taken: The Engineer has not been retained or compensated to provide design and construction review services relating to the Contractor's safety precautions or to means, methods, techniques, sequences or procedures required for the Contractor to perform his work. The Contractor will be solely and completely responsible for conditions of the job site,

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260500 - 1 December 15, 2017 including safety of all persons and property during performance of the work. This requirement will apply continuously and not be limited to normal working hours. The duty of the Engineer to conduct construction observations of the contractor's performance is not intended to include review of the adequacy of the contractor's safety measures in, on or near the construction site.

1.4 DRAWINGS AND SPECIFICATIONS

A. Intent: The electrical drawings and specifications are intended to include all labor and materials necessary to provide a complete and operating facility. Any materials shown and called for on the drawings but not mentioned in the specifications, or vice versa, which are necessary for the proper completion of the installation or operation of the equipment, shall be furnished the same as if specifically called for in both. By submitting a bid, the Contractor is acknowledging that he has made a thorough examination of the contract documents, existing site conditions, and has determined that these documents and conditions do sufficiently describe the scope of construction work required under this contract. Any questions regarding interpretation of the contract documents shall be made in writing in a timely manner prior to the bid date to allow reasonable time for resolution of the questions.

B. Diagrammatic Drawings: The electrical drawings are diagrammatic and do not show exact or complete raceway and wiring configurations, routing, rating or the necessary number and types of raceway fittings or pull boxes. Provide all labor and materials required to execute the work.

1.5 SUBMITTALS AND SHOP DRAWINGS

A. It is the Contractor's responsibility to thoroughly review vendor-assembled shop drawings, catalog cuts, etc. to ensure that these documents are complete and comply with the specifications.

B. All submittals and shop drawings must be stamped by the Electrical Contractor and the General Contractor confirming they have been reviewed and comply with the contract documents. Submittals which are not stamped will be returned unreviewed.

C. Submittal Format: 1. General: The submittals must include all specified material. Multiple submittals will not be accepted. 2. Electronic submittals can be submitted. However, bound hard copies of the distribution equipment (switchboards, transformers, distribution panels and panelboards) and lighting must be provided. 3. Shop Drawings: Only one hard copy shall be provided for review. One electronic copy (PDF) will be returned.

D. Review: The review of a manufacturer's name or product does not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility for providing materials and equipment which comply in all details with the requirements of the contract documents. Contractor shall be solely responsible for submitting materials at such a time to allow a minimum of two weeks for Engineer's review.

1.6 OPERATIONS AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

A. Prepare operations and maintenance manuals for all electrical equipment installed on this project.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260500 - 2 December 15, 2017 B. Provide table of contents at front of manual indicating general content of each section. Provide index for each section of the manual with complete equipment catalog item or identification.

C. The information and diagrams included must be on the specific equipment installed for this project. General "product line" information is not acceptable. The equipment model and catalog numbers with appropriate prefixes and suffixes must be clearly indicated on the data sheets. Manuals shall contain shop drawings, schematic and wiring diagrams (showing all external connections), parts lists, operating and maintenance information. Any modifications to equipment in the field shall be updated on the drawings, diagrams, etc. to reflect the "as-built" conditions.

D. Bind with three-screw post-type binder with heavy-duty hardboard cover and cloth backing. Imprint the edge of volume with name of the project, year of completion and the words "Electrical Equipment." Front of manual shall be imprinted with the words "Electrical Equipment," the name of the project, the name of the Owner, year completed, and name of the Architect, Engineer and Contractor. All printing in gold lettering. If the thickness of the manual exceeds approximately two inches, provide separate volumes, each being a maximum two inches thick. Each volume shall be imprinted as described above and include the volume number.

E. Submit 2 CD-ROM copies of the operations and maintenance manual. Disk data is to be in Adobe Acrobat v11.0 or later. Arrange information and materials in the same order and categories as is typical of printed hard copy O&M manuals as described in this section. Disk PDF file shall include electronic “bookmarks” for each category, specification section and subsection.

F. One preliminary copy shall be submitted to the Engineer for review 30 days prior to completion of the project. Preliminary copy shall include proposed wording for cover and back edge of the manual. Submit final bound copies for distribution as required in Division 01.

1.7 RECORD DRAWINGS

A. A record shall be made during the progress of the project indicating the work as actually installed. Corrections and changes shall be kept up to date at all times on a separate set of record drawings kept at the job site for review. Mark-ups may be schematic as related to interior raceway systems; however, all raceways shall be shown in proper relationship with junction boxes, panelboards, devices and equipment. Raceways installed below grade shall be shown with both horizontal and vertical dimensions with an accuracy of ± six inches.

B. Project Closeout: The Contractor shall provide as-built drawings at completion of the project indicating work as revised, detailed and actually installed.

C. Additional Record Drawings: Refer to Division 27 and 28 sections for additional record drawing requirements. AutoCAD production requirements also apply to all special system drawings.

1.8 DEFINITIONS

A. Provide: To furnish and install.

B. Wiring: Raceway, conductors and connections.

C. Exposed: Visible from occupied areas.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260500 - 3 December 15, 2017 D. Install: To set in position and make fully operational.

E. Furnish: Purchase and deliver to the job site.

F. Required: As required by code, authority having jurisdiction or contract documents for the system and/or installation to be fully operational.

1.9 COORDINATION

A. UTILITIES SERVICES 1. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to contact all utility companies, including but not limited to the power company, telephone company and cable television company, and verify the extent of work to be performed by the utility companies. All other labor and necessary materials, provided by the utility companies shall be provided by the Contractor. 2. Coordination and scheduling new services with the various utility companies is the sole responsibility of the Contractor. 3. In general, the Contractor shall be responsible for providing the following: a. Trenching, backfill and compaction. b. Raceways. c. Manholes and vaults (including grounding). d. Concrete encasement of raceways (where called out on the drawings or specified). e. Obtaining all necessary permits. 4. Service Charges: All utility service charges will be paid by the Owner. 5. Applications for Services: It shall be the contractor's responsibility to complete and submit all required applications for service with the various utility companies.

B. Work of Other Trades: The electrical drawings do not show complete details of the building construction. Refer to the Architectural, Structural, Civil, Landscape, Mechanical and Kitchen Drawings for details which may affect the execution of this work. Specific locations of construction features shall be obtained from the reference drawings, field measurements, or the trade providing the material or equipment. No extra payments will be allowed for failure to obtain this information.

C. The Contractor will not be paid for work requiring reinstallation due to lack of coordination prior to installation such as removing and replacing, relocating, cutting, patching or finishing. Special attention is called to the following items and all conflicts shall be coordinated prior to installation: 1. Light switches will be located on the "strike" side of the door. 2. All electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and other electrical outlets and equipment are installed to avoid conflict with grilles, pipes, sprinkler heads, ducts and other mechanical equipment. 3. Electrical outlets, lighting fixtures and equipment are to be installed in proper relation to cabinets, counters, doors and other architectural appurtenances.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260500 - 4 December 15, 2017 4. Electrical characteristics (HP, kVA, voltage, phase, fusing, overload protection) of actual equipment furnished under other divisions being different from that shown on the electrical drawings.

D. Provide access panels for electrical items that are behind finished surfaces or otherwise concealed.

E. Provide all required firestopping for electrical work.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 STANDARD OF QUALITY

A. General: Whenever any material or equipment is specified by patent or proprietary name or by the name of the manufacturer, such specification shall establish the minimum standard of quality in that particular field of manufacture. The engineer shall be the sole and final judge as to quality and acceptability of substitutions, no exceptions.

2.2 PRODUCT LISTING AND LABELING

A. All electrical equipment shall be Underwriters Laboratories listed and labeled. Equipment in compliance with UL standards but not bearing their label is not acceptable. If the manufacturer cannot arrange for labeling of an assembled unit at the factory, the necessary inspection and acceptance by the testing facility shall be performed in the field at no additional cost to the Owner, and be acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction.

2.3 ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT

A. Scope: Provide the equipment for the various primary and secondary voltage distribution systems including switchgear, service transformer, service switchboards, distribution switchboards, panelboard equipment, motor control centers, dry-type transformers, and all miscellaneous equipment.

B. Type: The distribution equipment shall provide a quality system with the highest degree of safety, protection, and integrity.

C. Space for Future Circuit Breakers and Fused Switches: Provide as indicated on drawings; shall be completely equipped for the future addition of a circuit breaker or fused switch, including all connections. Each switchboard or panelboard section shall be fully bussed with spaces available the entire height of the equipment.

D. Finish: Finish of all distribution equipment and other associated equipment shall match and unless specified otherwise shall be manufacturer's standard light gray.

E. Phasing: 1. Phase arrangement for all bussing and terminations in switchboards, panelboards, motor starter centers, transformers, etc. shall be as follows when viewed from the front: Phase A Front Left Top Phase B Center Center Center

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260500 - 5 December 15, 2017 Phase C Rear Right Bottom 2. Lugs for switchboards, panelboards, transformers and other distribution equipment connections shall be hydraulically set compression lugs.

F. Manufacturer: The number of manufacturers shall be kept to a minimum to maintain close control and coordinate the various components of the distribution systems. All electrical distribution equipment shall be provided by the same manufacturer. Dimensions are critical. Each manufacturer shall verify that the equipment proposed will fit within the spaces provided with adequate working clearances.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 GENERAL

A. All materials shall be new, free from defects and arrive at the job site in their original unopened containers.

B. Comply with NECA 1. Where a conflict exists between NECA 1 and the contract documents, the most restrictive/expense shall govern.

3.2 MATERIAL STORAGE

A. Make all necessary provisions for storing materials and equipment at site so as to insure the quality and fitness of the items to be incorporated in the work. Equipment shall be stored to prevent damage and corrosion.

3.3 TEMPORARY ELECTRICAL SERVICES

A. Construction will occur in numerous phases. Provide design-build temporary electrical services and obtain the required permits to accommodate construction sequencing and phasing.

B. Refer to the Division 1 Specifications and the Mechanical and Electrical Drawings for Sequencing and Phasing requirements.

3.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION

A. Each low-voltage system, including controls, shall be tested and the equipment programmed at the completion of each phase.

3.5 INTERRUPTION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL SERVICE

A. Interruption of Existing Electrical Service: Do not interrupt electrical service to facilities occupied by Owner or others unless permitted under the following conditions and then only after providing temporary electrical services. 1. Notify the Owner no fewer than 48 hours in advance of proposed interruption of electrical service. 2. Do not proceed with interruption of electrical service without the Owner's written permission.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260500 - 6 December 15, 2017 3.6 EXISTING CONDITIONS

A. General: Specific scope of demolition work and operating conditions to be encountered shall be verified by on-site review prior to submitting bid. Demolition work, in general, is noted or shown on the documents based upon available "drawings of record" and may not show the actual conditions as they presently exist. The Contractor shall be responsible for removing or modifying the existing electrical installation as required by the building alterations. The Contractor shall be responsible for protection of existing equipment and wiring to be retained or reinstalled and shall replace any equipment damaged during the process of removal and reinstallation.

B. Owner Retained Equipment: The Owner may wish to retain certain specific items scheduled for demolition. The Contractor shall carefully remove these items, provide protection and packaging as may be required to protect the equipment and turn over said equipment to the Owner at a place designated on the jobsite. Any equipment that the Owner does not desire to retain shall become the property of the Contractor and be removed from the site.

C. Existing Raceways and Wiring: 1. No existing raceways or wiring shall be reused unless specifically shown on the drawings. 2. Unused Raceways and Wiring: All unused conductors in existing buildings shall be removed. All unused raceway shall be removed except where located in or above existing construction which is not being altered and would require removal and replacement of the existing construction. 3. Continuity of Service To and In Existing Building: The Contractor shall reroute existing raceways, wiring and equipment which is in conflict with building alterations. The Contractor's bid shall include intercepting and relocating existing raceways in ten different locations throughout the project. These locations are in addition to those shown on the drawings. Each location shall be assumed to have four 3/4" EMT raceways that are each 100-lineal feet in length and each containing seven #12 AWG conductors which must be intercepted and relocated. 4. Ceiling Panels: Remove and reinstall all necessary panels in existing accessible ceilings, as required for the installation of electrical work. Where existing ceiling panels are damaged, they shall be replaced with new units. After ceiling removal and reinstallation is complete, the ceiling system appearance shall match adjacent similar ceilings that have not been removed. 5. Work Caused by Removal and Reinstallation of Existing Material: Existing electrical work which is to be removed and reinstalled as a result of the installation of work by other trades shall be performed by the Electrical Contractor at no additional expense to the Owner. 6. Existing fluorescent fixture ballasts to be removed shall be assumed to contain PCBs/Mercury and are to be treated as hazardous materials. Removal and disposal of these fixtures are to comply with all local, state and federal agency requirements. Provide documentation as required by all regulating agencies as proof of proper disposal. 7. Openings in walls and floors resulting from removal of conduits and/or devices are to be patched with materials equivalent to adjacent surfaces. Materials used for patching shall maintain the fire rating of the existing area. 8. Existing raceways and exposed cabling above existing suspended ceilings shall be resupported from the building structure.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260500 - 7 December 15, 2017 3.7 COMMON REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A. Measure indicated mounting heights to bottom of unit for suspended items and to center of unit for wall-mounting items.

3.8 SLEEVE INSTALLATION FOR ELECTRICAL PENETRATIONS

A. General: 1. Provide sleeves for all penetrations unless core-drilled holes or formed openings are used. 2. Extend sleeves installed in floors two inches above finished floor level. 3. Size sleeves to provide 1/4-inch annular clear space between sleeve and raceway or cable, unless indicated otherwise. 4. Seal space outside of sleeves with grout for penetrations of concrete and masonry. Pack grout solidly between sleeve and wall so no voids remain. Tool exposed surfaces smooth; protect grout while curing.

B. Interior Penetrations of Nonfire-Rated Walls and Floors: Provide EMT sleeves. Seal space between sleeve and wall or floor, using joint sealant appropriate for size, depth and location of joint.

C. Fire-Rated Assembly Penetrations: Maintain indicated fire rating of walls, partitions, ceilings and floors at raceway penetrations. 1. Penetrations at Walls, Partition and Ceilings: Provide STI "EZ Path" assemblies. 2. Floors: Provide EMT sleeves. Seal pathway and cable penetration with firestop materials.

D. Roof Penetration Sleeves: Provide a four-pound lead-plumbing vent flashing. Provide counter flashing attached above with a stainless-steel draw band clamp.

E. Aboveground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Provide steel pipe sleeves. Select sleeve size to allow for one-inch annular clear space between pipe and seal penetration utilizing mechanical sleeve seals.

F. Underground, Exterior-Wall Penetrations: Install cast-iron pipe sleeves. Size sleeves to allow for one-inch annular clear space between raceway or cable and sleeve. Seal penetration utilizing mechanical sleeve seals.

3.9 FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated floor, wall and ceiling assemblies for electrical installations to restore original fire-resistance rating of the assembly.

3.10 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. Provide all required cutting, demolition and patching required for the installation of the electrical work. Penetrations through structural walls, ceiling or floor slabs shall be core drilled. In no case shall structural members be penetrated without prior approval of the structural engineer.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260500 - 8 December 15, 2017 3.11 PAINTING

A. Touch up electrical equipment with factory-finished surfaces as required using factory-furnished paint. Do not paint screw heads, hinges, nameplates, hardware, etc. All surface-mounted raceways in finished areas shall be painted to match adjacent surfaces.

3.12 CLEANING

A. Promptly remove waste material and rubbish resulting from electrical work.

B. Prior to energizing equipment, remove all dirt and debris. Vacuum and wipe-down all surfaces.

C. Clean all equipment and fixtures at completion of the project.

3.13 CONSTRUCTION OBSERVATION AND FINAL ACCEPTANCE

A. Site Review: On-site meetings or reviews of construction by the Engineer shall not be construed as acceptance by these parties as related to quantities, rough-in locations and compliance with code enforcing authorities.

B. Testing: The Contractor shall test all wiring and all electrical equipment to verify absence of grounds and short circuits and verify proper operation, rotation, and phase relationship. Contractor will be responsible for scheduling of tests and demonstrations at times mutually acceptable to the Owner. All equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of this specification and the manufacturer's recommendations. Operate every device manually and automatically in accordance with its purpose. Tests shall be performed in the presence of the Owner or his designated representative. All instruments and personnel required to conduct the test shall be provided by the Contractor. Any test not witnessed by the Owner shall be waived by written document. All such documents must become the property of the Owner upon completion of construction.

3.14 INSTRUCTION FOR OWNER’S PERSONNEL

A. Scope: Following initial operation of all electrical equipment and prior to acceptance of the electrical work, conduct demonstrations of equipment operation and instruction periods for the Owner's representatives.

B. Instruction Periods: Shall include preliminary discussion and presentation of information from maintenance manuals with appropriate references to drawings, followed by tours of equipment spaces explaining maintenance requirements, access methods, servicing and maintenance procedures, settings and available system and equipment adjustments.

C. Contractor's representatives, in general, who conduct these instructions and demonstrations shall be qualified foremen or superintendents acquainted with this project and from the trade involved. The representative shall be the manufacturer's representatives with operating experience and substantial design experience on this project for major equipment. Their qualifications shall be submitted to the Architect and Engineer before conducting the instruction period.

D. Minimum Duration of Instruction Periods: 1. Electrical Distribution System: Four hours.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260500 - 9 December 15, 2017 2. Low-Voltage Systems: Four hours each unless noted otherwise. 3. Refer to other sections of the specification for additional testing requirements.

E. Scheduling of Instruction Periods: Provide notice of contractor's readiness to conduct such instruction and demonstration periods to the Owner at least two weeks prior to each instruction period and reach agreement on the date of each instruction period.

F. Prepare a written statement of acceptance for the Owner's signature. The statement shall be substantially as follows: "I (the Contractor), the associated factory representatives and the subcontractor, have thoroughly tested each of the following systems and have proved their normal operation to the Owner's rep- resentative and have instructed him in the operation and maintenance thereof."

Owner's System Demonstrator Representative Date Electrical Distribution & Lighting ______Communications Systems ______(List each system specified) Safety and Security Systems ______(List each system specified)

______Owner's Representative Date

______Electrical Contractor Date

G. Send copies of this acceptance to the Architect and the Engineer and place one copy in each maintenance manual.

H. Completion of Work: When requesting final inspection, provide ten-day notice. Submit written certifications that the work has been fully completed in strict accordance with the plans and specifications.

END OF SECTION 260500

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260500 - 10 December 15, 2017 SECTION 260519 – LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cerro Wire 2. CME Wire and Cable 3. Encore Wire Corp. 4. Republic Wire 5. Southwire/General Cable

B. Conductors: Stranded copper.

C. Conductor Insulation: Type THHN-THWN.

2.2 MULTICONDUCTOR ARMORED CABLE (MC)

A. NFPA 70, Type MC with copper conductors, Type TFN/THHN conductor insulation and copper sheath drain wire.

2.3 FIRE-RATED CABLE

A. NFPA 70, Type MI (Mineral Insulated) with copper conductors, copper sheath, two-hour fire- resistive rating, UL listed.

2.4 CONNECTORS AND SPLICES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. O-Z/Gedney 2. 3M 3. Tyco

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260519 - 1 December 15, 2017 B. Description: Factory-fabricated connectors and splices of size, ampacity rating, material, type, and class for application and service indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 CONDUCTOR MATERIAL APPLICATIONS

A. Feeders: Stranded copper.

B. Branch Circuits: Stranded copper.

3.2 CONDUCTOR INSULATION AND WIRING METHODS

A. Service Entrance: Type THHN-THWN single conductors in raceway.

B. Feeders: Type THHN-THWN single conductors in raceway.

C. Branch Circuits: Type THHN-THWN single conductors in raceway.

D. Fire Pump and Control Wiring Installed within Buildings: Two-hour, fire-rated cable.

E. Minimum Conductor Size: 1. Neutral: #10 AWG (#12 AWG minimum for dedicated neutrals and lighting circuits). 2. Ground: #12 AWG. 3. Phase Conductors (more than six in a raceway): #10 AWG. 4. Phase Conductors (six or less in a raceway): #12 AWG. 5. Branch Circuit Homeruns (longer than 75 feet): #10 AWG.

F. Cord Drops and Portable Appliance Connections: Type SO, hard service cord with stainless- steel, wire-mesh, and strain relief device at terminations to suit application.

G. Class 1 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN in raceway.

H. Class 2 Control Circuits: Type THHN-THWN in raceway.

I. Multiconductor Armored Cable (MC): Provide only where specifically called out on the drawings.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF CONDUCTORS AND CABLES

A. Use manufacturer-approved pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation. Do not exceed manufacturer's recommended maximum pulling tensions and sidewall pressure values.

B. Wiring from separate systems shall not be intermixed in a common junction box.

C. Wiring shown in separate raceways shall not be combined.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260519 - 2 December 15, 2017 D. Feeders: Make no splices unless shown on the plans.

E. Branch Circuits: Homeruns longer than 75 feet to the first outlet shall be #10 AWG minimum for the entire length of the circuit. Make no splices in homeruns.

3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Tighten electrical connectors and terminals according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.

B. Feeder Splices: Make splices with hydraulically set long barrel connections insulated with heat shrink tubing.

C. Lighting and Receptacle Branch Circuit Splices: Insulated screw-on type connectors.

D. Wiring at Outlets: Install conductor at each outlet with at least six inches of slack.

E. Below-Grade Splices: Make splices in handholes and insulate with epoxy resin-type splicing kits. 3M or equal.

F. Termination at Busses (Panel, Switchboard, Transformers, ATS, etc.): Hydraulically-set compression lugs.

END OF SECTION 260519

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260519 - 3 December 15, 2017

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260519 - 4 December 15, 2017 SECTION 260533 – RACEWAYS AND BOXES

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. EMT: Electrical metallic tubing

B. FMC: Flexible metal conduit

C. LFMC: Liquidtight flexible metal conduit

D. RMC: Rigid metal conduit

E. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit

F. SMR: Surface Metal Raceway

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product provided.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable 2. Allied Tube 3. Electri-Flex

B. Rigid Metal Conduit (RMC): 1. General: Comply with ANSI C80.1. 2. Fittings: a. Couplings: Threaded metallic type of the same material as the conduit. b. Locknuts: Steel up to two inches, malleable iron for 2-1/2 inches and larger. c. Bushings: Bakelite or plastic up to two inches, malleable iron with insulating collar for 2-1/2 inches and larger. d. Unions: Zinc-plated malleable iron, three-piece coupling.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260533 - 1 December 15, 2017 e. Expansion Fittings: Steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, including flexible external bonding jumper.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT): 1. General: Comply with ANSI C80.3. 2. Fittings: a. 1-1/2 inches and smaller: Steel compression type employing a split corrugated ring and tightening nut. b. Two inches and larger: Steel, set-screw-type containing dual set-screws on each side of coupling. c. Exterior: UL-Listed, raintight, steel, compression-type with silicon rubber internal sealing rings. d. Expansion Fittings: Steel to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed, and including flexible external bonding jumper.

D. Flexible Metallic Conduit (FMC): 1. General: Zinc-coated steel. 2. Fittings: Steel, one- or two-screw clamp type.

E. Liquid-Tight Flexible Metallic Conduit (LFMC): 1. General: Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. 2. Fittings: Galvanized steel, compression type.

2.2 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. AFC Cable 2. Anamet 3. Electri-Flex 4. Carlon

B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC): 1. General: Comply with NEMA TC 2, Type EPC-40-PVC. 2. Fittings: Comply with NEMA TC 3; same material as the conduit. 3. Expansion Fittings: PVC to match conduit type, complying with UL 651, rated for environmental conditions where installed.

2.3 SURFACE METAL RACEWAYS (SMR)

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260533 - 2 December 15, 2017 1. Thomas & Betts 2. Wiremold

B. Color: Ivory

C. Single-Channel Raceway: Two-piece raceway with a single compartment and snap cover. Provide raceways with nominal dimensions as follows: 1. Raceway fill shall not exceed 40%. 2. Power Conductors: a. Up to Three #12 AWG Conductors: 21/32" x 3/4". b. Up to Six #12AWG Conductors: 1-9/32" x 3/4". 3. UTP Cables: a. Up to Two Cables: 1-9/32" x 3/4". b. Up to (15) Cables: 2-3/4" x 1-7/16". c. More than 15 Cables: Provide multiple raceways. 4. Other Low-Voltage Cables: a. One Cable: 21/32" x 3/4". b. More Than One Cable: Size raceway for 40% full. Maximum raceway size shall be 2-3/4" x 1-7/16".

D. Two-Channel Raceway: 1. Raceway fill shall not exceed 40 percent. 2. Provide where shown on the drawings. 3. Raceway: Two-piece raceway with divider and snap cover. Nominal dimensions shall be 4-3/4" x 1-3/4". 4. Device-Mounting Brackets: High-impact plastic bracket with trim plate. Trim plate shall overlap raceway cover for a seamless transition between cover fittings. Provide insert for each device installed. Provide blank insert where only one device is provided.

2.4 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET BOXES

A. Manufacturer: Randl Industries.

B. Description: 5” square width x 2.875” deep one piece pressed steel, electrogalvanized with cable management. Randl Industries #T-55057.

2.5 BOXES, ENCLOSURES AND CABINETS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Cooper Crouse-Hinds 2. EGS/Appleton Electric

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260533 - 3 December 15, 2017 3. Hoffman 4. Hubbell 5. RACO 6. Thomas & Betts 7. Wiremold

B. Small Sheet Metal Pull and Junction Boxes: Comply with NEMA OS 1.

C. Hinged-Cover Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, steel, continuous-hinge cover with flush latch, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel.

D. Cabinets: 1. NEMA 250, Type 1, galvanized-steel box with removable interior panel and removable front, finished inside and out with manufacturer's standard enamel. 2. Hinged door in front cover with flush latch and concealed hinge. 3. Key latch to match panelboards. 4. Metal barriers to separate wiring of different systems and voltage.

2.6 FLOOR BOXES

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Hubbell Systemone (General Purpose) 2. Rhino Manufacturers, Snohomish, WA (Kitchen/Gym/Commons)

B. General Purpose: 1. Recessed, 4-gang, 16-gauge, galvanized sheet metal floor box with all required accessories to mount the receptacles and low-voltage devices as shown on the drawings. 2. The floor box shall be listed as follows: a. UL 514A b. UL scrub water compliant 3. Provide black powder-coated ADA compliant cover as follows: a. Carpet, Tile, VCT or Wood Floors: Surface style cover. b. Tile, Concrete or Terrazzo Floors: Flush style cover. 4. Provide box with fusion-bonded green epoxy paint for slab on grade installations.

C. Kitchen/Commons: 1. Custom manufactured, recessed, heavy-duty, stainless-steel floor box with all required accessories to mount the receptacles and low-voltage devices as shown on the drawings. 2. The floor box shall be listed as follows: a. UL Listed ad Labeled.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260533 - 4 December 15, 2017 b. UL scrub water compliant. 3. Provide H-20 rated, aircraft aluminum, fully-gasketed cover as follows: a. Carpet, Tile and VCT Floors: Provide recess in cover to accommodate the floor covering in the room. b. Tile, Concrete and Terrazzo Floors: Provide standard cover.

2.7 MULTI-SYSTEM WALL BOX

A. Manufacturer: Hubbell

B. Recessed wall box with module faceplates to accommodate receptacles and special systems devices as shown on the drawings. Provide barrier to divide box for high and low-voltage wiring. Provide four-gang box for up to three devices. Provide six-gang box for four or more devices. Hubbell Multi-Connect HBLWSCSX series wall box with wall flange and faceplates to accommodate devices shown on the drawings. Flange and faceplates to be ivory.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 RACEWAY APPLICATION

A. Outdoors: Apply raceway products as specified below, unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed Conduit: RMC. 2. Concealed Conduit, Above Ground: RMC. 3. Underground Conduit: RNC with RMC elbows. 4. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Motor-Driven equipment): LFMC. 5. Boxes and Enclosures, Above Ground: NEMA 250, Type 3R.

B. Indoors: Apply raceway products as specified below unless otherwise indicated: 1. Exposed, Not Subject to Physical Damage: EMT. 2. Exposed and Subject to Physical Damage: RMC. Includes raceways in the following locations: a. Loading docks. b. Corridors used for traffic of mechanized carts, forklifts and pallet-handling units. 3. Concealed in Ceilings and Interior Walls and Partitions: EMT. 4. Existing Walls in Finished Areas: SMR. 5. Connection to Vibrating Equipment (Including Transformers and Motor-Driven Equipment): FMC, except use LFMC in damp or wet locations. 6. Damp or Wet Locations: RMC. 7. Boxes and Enclosures: NEMA 250, Type 1, except use NEMA 250, Type 3R, in damp or wet locations.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260533 - 5 December 15, 2017 C. Minimum Raceway Size: 1. General: 3/4 inches unless otherwise indicated. 2. Raceways with no more than three No. 12 AWG conductors shall be 1/2 inches unless otherwise indicated.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Comply with NECA 1 for installation requirements applicable to products specified in Part 2 except where requirements on Drawings or in this Article are stricter.

B. Raceways shall be concealed in finished areas. Where existing wall surfaces are inaccessible, surface metal raceways shall be provided. Raceways may be surface mounted in unfinished equipment spaces such as mechanical rooms, electrical rooms, elevator machine rooms and attic spaces.

C. Floor Boxes: 1. Coat boxes mounted in floor slabs with bitumstic coal, tar epoxy sealant, Carboline 300M series or equal. 2. Floor box shall flush with the top of the finished floor slab.

D. Surface Metal Raceway: 1. Provide two-compartment SMR where shown on the drawings. 2. Conduits serving SMR shall be fully concealed in wall construction or above the suspended ceiling. 3. Provide a separate, continuous, unbroken ground conductor in all SMR containing power circuit.

E. Branch circuit raceways in telecommunication rooms shall be concealed within the wall.

F. Install exposed raceways as high as possible, above ductwork, parallel or at right angles to building lines.

G. Expansion and Seismic Joints: 1. Raceways shall not be installed in concrete slab or wall construction when passing through an expansion or seismic joints. 2. Raceways shall be installed in furred or suspended ceiling spaces with a minimum of 36 inches of flexible conduit crossing the expansion or seismic joints. Secure raceways each side of joint.

H. Raceways shall be installed parallel or at right angles to the building construction. This applies to all exposed raceways as well as all raceways above suspended ceiling.

I. Raceways shall not be run in floor slabs, under heavy equipment, footings or other structural elements that might adversely affect the integrity of the raceways system or building structure. Raceways installed above suspended ceilings shall be a minimum of six inches clear above top of ceiling system.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260533 - 6 December 15, 2017 J. Raceways shall not be installed in floor slabs or structural columns.

K. Underground Metallic Raceways or Metallic Raceways in Contact with Concrete: Wrap raceway with .010-inch thick pipe-wrapping plastic tape applied with a 50 percent overlap (3M Scotchrap Tape 50).

L. Pullboxes with Covers: Provided as shown on the drawings and as required by the NEC. All pullboxes shall be accessible.

M. Exterior Walls: Conduits passing through exterior walls below grade and/or bridging an area which was previously excavated and backfilled shall be rigidly supported by a structurally reinforced concrete duct bank spanning between the building wall and a bearing surface on undisturbed earth.

N. Cleaning of Raceways: The interior and exterior of all conduits and other raceways shall be thoroughly cleaned of all material. All conduits shall be capped or plugged after installation.

O. Keep raceways at least six inches away from parallel runs of flues and steam or hot-water pipes. Install horizontal raceway runs above water and steam piping.

P. Complete raceway installation before starting conductor installation.

Q. Arrange stub-ups so curved portions of bends are not visible above the finished slab.

R. Install no more than the equivalent of three 90-degrees bends in any conduit run except for communications conduits, for which fewer bends are allowed.

S. Threaded Conduit Joints, Exposed to Wet, Damp, Corrosive, or Outdoor Conditions: Apply listed compound to threads of raceway and fittings before making up joints.

T. Raceway Terminations at Locations Subject to Moisture or Vibration: Use insulating bushings to protect conductors, including conductors smaller than No. 4 AWG.

U. Provide pull strings in empty raceways. Use polypropylene or monofilament plastic line with not less than 200-lb tensile strength. Leave at least 12 inches of slack at each end of pull wire.

V. Install raceway sealing fittings at suitable, approved and accessible locations and fill them with listed sealing compound. Install each fitting for concealed raceways in a flush steel box with a blank cover plate having a finish similar to that of adjacent plates or surfaces. Install raceway sealing fittings at the following points: 1. Where conduits pass from warm to cold locations, such as boundaries of refrigerated spaces. 2. Where otherwise required by NFPA 70.

W. Thermal Expansion Fittings 1. RNC: Install in each run of aboveground conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 30°F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 25 feet. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.00041 inch per foot of length of straight run per degree F of temperature change.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260533 - 7 December 15, 2017 2. EMT and RMC: Install in each run of aboveground RMC and EMT conduit that is located where environmental temperature change may exceed 100°F and that has straight-run length that exceeds 100 feet. Install fitting(s) that provide expansion and contraction for at least 0.000078 inch per foot of length of straight run per degree Fahrenheit of temperature change for metal conduits. 3. Install expansion-joint fittings for each of the following locations and provide type and quantity of fittings that accommodate temperature change listed for location: a. Outdoor Locations Not Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 125 degrees F temperature change. b. Outdoor Locations Exposed to Direct Sunlight: 155 degrees F temperature change. c. Indoor Spaces: Connected with the outdoors without physical separation; 125 degrees F temperature change. d. Attics: 135 degrees F temperature change. e. Utility Tunnels: 155 degrees F temperature change. 4. Install each expansion-joint fitting with position, mounting, and piston setting selected according to manufacturer's written instructions for conditions at specific location at the time of installation.

X. Flexible Conduit Connections: Use maximum of eight feet of flexible conduit for recessed and semirecessed lighting fixtures, equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement; and for transformers and motors. 1. Use LFMC in damp or wet locations subject to severe physical damage. 2. Use LFMC or LFNC in damp or wet locations not subject to severe physical damage.

Y. Recessed Boxes in Masonry Walls: Saw-cut opening for box in center of cell of masonry block and install box flush with surface of wall.

Z. Set metal floor boxes level and flush with finished floor surface.

3.3 RACEWAYS AND CABLE INSTALLATION PATHWAYS FOR LOW-VOLTAGE SYSTEMS

A. Installation of Raceways/Pathways for low-voltage systems shall be in accordance with the applicable portions of ANSI/TIA-569-D, Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces.

B. Conduits above lay-in ceilings: Do not install cables in conduits that are supported from the ceiling suspension system. All conduits shall be supported independently of the ceiling support system.

C. Conduit fill shall not exceed 40 percent.

D. Bend radii for conduits shall meet the following requirements: 1. If the conduit has an internal diameter of two inches or less, the bend radius must be at least six times the internal conduit diameter. 2. If the conduit has an internal diameter of more than two inches, the bend radius must be at least 10 times the internal conduit diameter.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260533 - 8 December 15, 2017 E. There shall be no more than two 90-degree bend between pull points in conduit, without derating of the conduit capacity. The conduit capacity shall be derated by 15 percent for each additional 90-degree bend. Increase conduit size as required to meet conduit fill requirements of this section and account for the derated capacity. Or, provide pull boxes to eliminate 90-degree bends as necessary to avoid having to derate conduit. Offsets shall be considered as equivalent to a 90- degree bend. Pull boxes added to conduit runs as of result of this requirement shall be in accordance with this section.

F. Conduits which are terminated at cable trays shall be supported from structure with a maximum distance of 24 inches from the tray. Conduits terminated at cable trays shall be bonded to the tray.

G. Exterior conduit shall be four inches Schedule 40 PVC with GRC elbows transitioning to four inches GRS for Service Entrances. Interior conduit for vertical riser cable shall be GRC, sized according to ANSI/TIA-569-D or as indicated on the Contract Drawings. Interior conduit for horizontal cable shall be EMT, sized according to ANSI/TIA-569-D standards or as indicated on the Contract Drawings.

H. Flexible conduit for telecommunications shall only be used in lengths not exceeding four feet, without prior written approval. If used, flexible metal conduit shall be increased by one trade size for the application used.

I. Conduits entering telecommunication rooms through the floor shall be terminated four inches above the finished floor. Conduits entering the rooms from above shall be terminated four inches below the finished ceiling. In no case shall the conduits terminate greater than 12 inches above the cable tray or distribution frame.

J. Conduits and cut-out openings between floors shall be sealed with removable and reusable firestopping material, to accommodate adds, moves and changes in the cabling system.

K. Conduits used for routing of low voltage cables shall have bushings at all stubouts.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF UNDERGROUND CONDUIT

A. Direct-Buried Conduit: 1. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for conduit. 2. Backfill shall be imported structure fill or imported gravel borrow according to WSDOT standards. 3. After installing conduit, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work toward end of conduit run, leaving conduit at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Firmly hand tamp backfill around conduit to provide maximum supporting strength. After placing controlled backfill to within 12 inches of finished grade, make final conduit connection at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. 4. Elbows: All elbows shall be RMC. a. Wrapped elbows with 3M Scotchrap Tape 50. b. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose and encase coupling with three inches of concrete.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260533 - 9 December 15, 2017 c. Extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of equipment pad or foundation for stub-ups at equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases. d. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

3.5 SLEEVE-SEAL INSTALLATION

A. Install to seal underground exterior wall penetrations.

B. Use type and number of sealing elements recommended by manufacturer for raceway material and size. Position raceway in center of sleeve. Assemble mechanical sleeve seals and install in annular space between raceway and sleeve. Tighten bolts against pressure plates that cause sealing elements to expand and make watertight seal.

3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide firestopping to electrical penetrations of fire-rated floor and wall assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.

3.7 SOUND CONTROL

A. General: The installation of the outlet boxes and conduit shall utilize installation methods which minimize sound transmission from one room to adjacent room or areas boxes shall not be located within 24 inches of each other or within the same study cavity.

B. Installation: 1. Boxes mounted in a common wall shall be offset horizontally whenever possible so that they are not mounted back-to-back. Connect offset boxes with flexible conduit not to exceed 24 inches in length. 2. Boxes may be mounted back-to-back (with permission) where it is not practical to offset, with a minimum clearance of ¼” inch between boxes. Wrap both boxes with STI putty pads. Connect boxes with flexible conduit. Do not nipple boxes mounted back-to-back.

END OF SECTION 260533

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260533 - 10 December 15, 2017 SECTION 260543 – UNDERGROUND DUCTS AND RACEWAYS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

1.2 DEFINITION

A. RNC: Rigid nonmetallic conduit.

B. RSC: Rigid Steel Conduit.

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product provided.

1.4 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of ducts, vaults, handholes and boxes with final arrangement of other utilities, site grading and surface features as determined in the field.

B. Coordinate elevations of ducts and duct-bank entrances into vaults, handholes and boxes with final locations and profiles of ducts and duct banks as determined by coordination with other utilities, underground obstructions and surface features. Revise locations and elevations from those indicated as required to suit field conditions and to ensure that duct runs drain to manholes and handholes.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 UNDERGROUND DUCTS

A. Rigid Steel Condui (RSC)t: Galvanized. Comply with ANSI C80.1.

B. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC): TC2, Type EPC-40 PCV, unless otherwise indicated.

2.2 DUCT SEPARATORS

A. Factory-fabricated rigid PVC interlocking spacers, sized for type and sizes of ducts with which used, and selected to provide minimum duct spacing's indicated while supporting ducts during concreting or backfilling.

2.3 WARNING TAPE

A. Underground-line warning tape specified in Division 26, Section 260553, "Identification."

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260543 - 1 December 15, 2017 2.4 INNERDUCT

A. Manufacturer: MaxCell "Detectable" series

B. Description: Three 1.25 inch ducts with integral 18-gauge solid copper core tracer wire.

2.5 PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS/MANHOLES/HANDHOLES

A. Manufacturer: Utility Vault Co.

B. Comply with ASTM C 858 for design and manufacturing processes.

C. Description: Factory-fabricated, reinforced-concrete, monolithically poured walls and bottom unless open-bottom enclosures are indicated. Frame and cover shall form top of enclosure and shall have load rating consistent with that of handhole or box.

D. Frame and Cover: Weatherproof steel frame with hinged steel access door assembly with tamper- resistant, captive, cover-securing bolts. 1. Cover Hinges: Concealed with hold-open ratchet assembly. 2. Cover Handle: Recessed.

E. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish shall have a minimum coefficient of friction of 0.50.

F. Cover Legend: Provide welded steel nameplate identifying the system within as follows: 1. Power: "POWER" 2. Lighting: "LIGHTING" 3. Telephone: "TELEPHONE" 4. Cable Television: "CABLE" 5. All other low-voltage systems: "SIGNAL"

G. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have integral closed bottom, unless otherwise indicated.

H. Windows: Precast openings in walls, arranged to match dimensions and elevations of approaching ducts and duct banks plus an additional 12 inches vertically and horizontally to accommodate alignment variations. 1. Windows shall be located no less than six inches from interior surfaces of walls, floors, or frames and covers of handholes, but close enough to corners to facilitate racking of cables on walls. 2. Window opening shall have cast-in-place, welded wire fabric reinforcement for field cutting and bending to tie in to concrete envelopes of duct banks. 3. Window openings shall be framed with at least two additional No. 4 steel reinforcing bars in concrete around each opening.

I. Duct Entrances in Walls: Cast end-bell or duct-terminating fitting in wall for each entering duct. 1. Type and size shall match fittings to duct or conduit to be terminated.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260543 - 2 December 15, 2017 2. Fittings shall align with elevations of approaching ducts and be located near interior corners of handholes to facilitate racking of cable.

2.6 HANDHOLES (OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE)

A. Manufacturer: Hubbell "Quazite" series.

B. Description: Fiberglass handles and boxes with polymer concrete frame and cover shall be sheet- molded, fiberglass-reinforced, polyester resin enclosure joined to polymer concrete top ring or frame.

C. Configuration: Units shall be designed for flush burial and have integral closed bottom, unless otherwise indicated.

D. Cover: Weatherproof, secured by tamper-resistant locking devices and having structural load rating consistent with enclosure.

E. Cover Finish: Nonskid finish.

F. Cover Legend: Molded lettering describing the system contained within as follows: 1. Power: "POWER" 2. Lighting: "LIGHTING" 3. Telephone: "TELEPHONE" 4. Cable Television: "CABLE" 5. All other low-voltage systems: "SIGNAL"

2.7 SEALING PRODUCTS

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Duct Plugs: Tyco Electronics, "Jackmoon" plugs. 2. Foam Sealant: TODAL Products Duo Dill 400.

2.8 Tamperproof hardware

A. Provide stainless steel tamperproof bolts to secure all vault, manhole and handhole covers. Verify bolt type with Owner.

2.9 ELBOWS

A. RSC: C Wrapped with 3M Scotchrap Tape 50

PART 3 - EXECUTION

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260543 - 3 December 15, 2017 3.1 UNDERGROUND DUCT APPLICATION

A. Ducts for Electrical Feeders 600 Volt and Less: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, direct-buried, unless otherwise indicated. Provide RSCelbows.

B. Ducts for Electrical Branch Circuits: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, direct-buried unless otherwise indicated.

C. Ducts for Low-Voltage Cabling: RNC, NEMA Type EPC-40-PVC, direct-buried unless otherwise indicated. Provide RSCelbows.

3.2 UNDERGROUND ENCLOSURE APPLICATION

A. Handholes: 1. Units in Roadways and Other Deliberate Traffic Paths: Precast concrete. AASHTO HB 17, H-20 structural load rating. 2. Units in Sidewalk and Similar Applications with a Safety Factor for Nondeliberate Loading by Vehicles: Heavy-duty fiberglass units with polymer concrete frame and cover, SCTE 77, Tier 8 structural load rating.

B. Precast Concrete Vaults/Manholes: H-20 structural load rating according to AASHTO HB 17.

3.3 EARTHWORK

A. Backfill: Utilize imported structural fill or gravel borrow per WSDOT standards.

B. Compact backfil but do not use heavy-duty, hydraulic-operated, compaction equipment.

C. Restore surface features at areas disturbed by excavation and reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. Replace removed sod immediately after backfilling is completed.

D. Restore areas disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying and other work. Restore vegetation and include necessary topsoiling, fertilizing, liming, seeding, sodding, sprigging and mulching.

E. Cut and patch existing pavement.

3.4 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Slope: Pitch ducts a minimum slope of 1:300 down toward manholes and handholes and away from buildings and equipment. Slope ducts from a high point in runs between two manholes to drain in both directions.

B. Curves and Bends: Use five-degree angle couplings for small changes in direction. Use manufactured long sweep bends with a minimum radius of 48 inches, both horizontally and vertically, at other locations, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Joints: Use solvent-cemented joints in ducts and fittings and make watertight according to manufacturer's written instructions. Stagger couplings so those of adjacent ducts do not lie in same plane.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260543 - 4 December 15, 2017 D. Duct Entrances to Vaults and Concrete and Polymer Concrete Handholes: Use end bells, spaced approximately 10 inches o.c. for five-inch ducts, and vary proportionately for other duct sizes. 1. Begin change from regular spacing to end-bell spacing 10 feet from the end bell without reducing duct line slope and without forming a trap in the line. 2. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: Install an expansion and deflection fitting in each conduit in the area of disturbed earth adjacent to manhole or handhole. 3. Grout end bells into structure walls from both sides to provide watertight entrances.

E. Sealing: Provide temporary closure at terminations of ducts that have cables pulled. Seal spare ducts at terminations. Use sealing compound and plugs to withstand at least 15-psig (1.03-MPa) hydrostatic pressure.

F. Pulling Cord: Install 100lbf- test nylon cord in ducts, including spares.

G. Concrete-Encased Ducts: 1. Support ducts on separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing and outdoor temperature. 2. Separator Installation: Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts with not less than four spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent floating during concreting. Stagger separators approximately six inches between tiers. Tie entire assembly together using fabric straps; do not use tie wires or reinforcing steel that may form conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 3. Concreting Sequence: Pour each run of envelope between manholes or other terminations in one continuous operation. a. Start at one end and finish at the other, allowing for expansion and contraction of ducts as their temperature changes during and after the pour. Use expansion fittings installed according to manufacturer's written recommendations, or use other specific measures to prevent expansion-contraction damage. b. If more than one pour is necessary, terminate each pour in a vertical plane and install 3/4-inch reinforcing rod dowels extending 18 inches into concrete on both sides of joint near corners of envelope. 4. Pouring Concrete: Spade concrete carefully during pours to prevent voids under and between conduits and at exterior surface of envelope. Do not allow a heavy mass of concrete to fall directly onto ducts. Use a plank to direct concrete down sides of bank assembly to trench bottom. Allow concrete to flow to center of bank and rise up in middle, uniformly filling all open spaces. Do not use power-driven agitating equipment unless specifically designed for duct-bank application. 5. Reinforcement: Reinforce concrete-encased duct banks where they cross disturbed earth and where indicated. Arrange reinforcing rods and ties without forming conductive or magnetic loops around ducts or duct groups. 6. Forms: Use walls of trench to form side walls of duct bank where soil is self-supporting and concrete envelope can be poured without soil inclusions; otherwise, use forms. 7. Minimum Space between Ducts: Three inches between ducts and exterior envelope wall, two inches between ducts for like services, and four inches between power and signal ducts.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260543 - 5 December 15, 2017 8. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 24 inches below finished grade in areas not subject to deliberate traffic, and at least 30 inches below finished grade in deliberate traffic paths for vehicles, unless otherwise indicated. 9. Stub-Ups: Use manufactured rigid-steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose and encase coupling with three inches of concrete. b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: For equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases, extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of base. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

H. Direct-Buried Duct Banks: 1. Support ducts on separators coordinated with duct size, duct spacing and outdoor temperature. 2. Space separators close enough to prevent sagging and deforming of ducts with not less than four spacers per 20 feet of duct. Secure separators to earth and to ducts to prevent displacement during backfill and yet permit linear duct movement due to expansion and contraction as temperature changes. Stagger separators approximately six inches between tiers. 3. Excavate trench bottom to provide firm and uniform support for duct bank. 4. After installing first tier of ducts, backfill and compact. Start at tie-in point and work toward end of duct run, leaving ducts at end of run free to move with expansion and contraction as temperature changes during this process. Repeat procedure after placing each tier. After placing last tier, hand-place backfill to four inches over ducts and hand tamp. Firmly hand tamp backfill around ducts to provide maximum supporting strength. Use hand tamper only. After placing controlled backfill over final tier, make final duct connections at end of run and complete backfilling with normal compaction. 5. Install ducts with a minimum of three inches between ducts for like services and six inches between power and signal ducts. 6. Depth: Install top of duct bank at least 36 inches below finished grade, unless otherwise indicated. 7. Set elevation of bottom of duct bank below the frost line. 8. Install manufactured rigid steel conduit elbows for stub-ups at poles and equipment and at building entrances through the floor. a. Couple steel conduits to ducts with adapters designed for this purpose and encase coupling with three inches of concrete. b. Stub-Ups to Equipment: Extend steel conduit horizontally a minimum of 60 inches from edge of base, for equipment mounted on outdoor concrete bases. Install insulated grounding bushings on terminations at equipment.

I. Warning Tape: Bury warning tape approximately 12 inches above all concrete-encased ducts and duct banks. Align tape parallel to and within three inches of the centerline of duct bank. Provide an additional warning tape for each 12-inch increment of duct-bank width over a nominal 18 inches. Space additional tapes 12 inches apart, horizontally.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260543 - 6 December 15, 2017 J. Innerduct: Provide Maxcell innerduct (three 1.25" innerducts) in every 4" duct being used for low-voltage cabling.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF PRECAST CONCRETE VAULTS, MANHOLES AND HANDHOLES

A. General: 1. Comply with ASTM C 891, unless otherwise indicated. 2. Install units level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. 3. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from one-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

B. Elevations: 1. Manhole Roof: Install with rooftop at least 15 inches below finished grade. 2. Manhole Frame: In paved areas and trafficways, set frames flush with finished grade. Set other manhole frames one inch above finished grade. 3. Install vaults with bottom below the frost line below grade. 4. Handhole Covers: In paved areas and trafficways, set surface flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes one inch above finished grade. 5. Where indicated, cast handhole cover frame integrally with handhole structure.

C. Waterproofing: Apply waterproofing to exterior surfaces.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF HANDHOLES (OTHER THAN PRECAST CONCRETE)

A. Install handholes and boxes level and plumb and with orientation and depth coordinated with connecting ducts to minimize bends and deflections required for proper entrances. Use box extension if required to match depths of ducts, and seal joint between box and extension as recommended by the manufacturer.

B. Unless otherwise indicated, support units on a level bed of crushed stone or gravel, graded from 1/2-inch sieve to No. 4 sieve and compacted to same density as adjacent undisturbed earth.

C. Elevation: In paved areas and trafficways, set so cover surface will be flush with finished grade. Set covers of other handholes one inch above finished grade.

D. Install handholes and boxes with bottom below the frost line below grade.

E. Field-cut openings for ducts and conduits according to enclosure manufacturer's written instructions. Cut wall of enclosure with a tool designed for material to be cut. Size holes for terminating fittings to be used, and seal around penetrations after fittings are installed.

3.7 GROUNDING

A. Ground underground ducts, vaults, manholes, handholes and utility structures according to Division 26, Section 260526, "Grounding and Bonding."

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260543 - 7 December 15, 2017 3.8 SEALING

A. Vaults and Manholes: 1. Provide blank duct plugs in all space ducts. 2. Provide "Jack Moon" plugs for ducts that have cables installed.

B. Handholes: Seal all ducts with two-part urethane foam sealant.

C. Ducts terminating within Building: Seal all ducts with two-part urethane foam sealant.

3.9 DRAINS

A. Provide two-inch drainline from each vault and manhole to nearest catch basin which is at a lower elevation than the bottom of the vault. Slope drain to catch basin.

3.10 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Comply with Section 260126, Acceptance Testing of Electrical Systems.

END OF SECTION 260543

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 260543 - 8 December 15, 2017 SECTION 270500 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR COMMUNICATIONS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

B. Comply with all requirements of Division 26.

1.2 DEFINITION

A. Telecommunications Room: MDF (ER) or IDF (TR or TC).

B. Pathway: Conduit, cable tray, sleeves, junction-hooks and D-rings.

1.3 SUMMARY

A. Design-Build Pathway System: 1. In general, only devices have been shown on the drawings. The Contractor shall provide a complete design-build pathway system. 2. Minimum raceway size shall be 3/4". 3. Unless specified as "open cabling" all wire and cabling shall be installed in continuous metallic raceways according to Division 26, "Raceways and Boxes." 4. Where specified as "open cabling" provide metallic raceways for cables in walls, above inaccessible ceilings, exposed or where subject to physical damage. Minimum raceway size shall be 3/4". 5. Raceway fill shall not exceed 40 percent.

B. Wire and Cable: 1. Comply with all requirements of Division 26 and other provisions of this section. 2. Unless specified otherwise, all cabling shall be plenum rated. 3. Provide wire and cable for each system according to the manufacturers requirements. 4. Underground cabling shall be UL listed for direct build.

1.4 PHASED CONSTRUCTION

A. Construction will occur in numerous phases. Each low-voltage system shall be tested and the equipment programmed at the completion of each phase.

B. Prior to substantial completion for the entire project, all low-voltage systems shall be completely retested.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 270500 - 1 December 15, 2017 1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit for each type of product provided.

B. Shop Drawings: 1. Raceway Riser Diagrams: Provide detailed raceway layout. Include designation of devices connected by raceway, raceway type and size, and type and size of wire and cable fill for each raceway run. 2. Site and Floor Plans: Indicate final outlet and device locations, routing of raceways, and cables inside and outside the building. 3. Device Identification: Identify each device by its address or identification number. 4. System Wiring Diagrams: Include system diagrams unique to project. Show connections for all devices, components, and auxiliary equipment. Include diagrams for equipment and for system with all terminals and interconnections identified. 5. Shop drawings shall utilize the final room numbers established by the Owner, not the room and building numbers shown on the architectural floor plans.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. Comply with all requirements of Division 26.

2.2 BACKBOARDS

A. Plywood, fire-retardant treated, 3/4 by 48 by 96 inches.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 PATHWAY INSTALLATION

A. Comply with ANSI/TIA -569-D for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

B. Comply with the material and installation requirements specified in Division 26, "Raceways and Boxes."

C. Provide long-radius elbows for all underground raceways.

D. Pathway Installation in Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. 2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 270500 - 2 December 15, 2017 4. Extend conduits four inches above finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.

3.2 WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Do not share raceways with other building wiring systems.

B. Wiring Within Enclosures: Bundle, lace and train conductors to terminal points. Use lacing bars and distribution spools. Separate power-limited and nonpower-limited conductors as recommended in writing by manufacturer. Install conductors parallel with or at right angles to sides and back of enclosure. Connect conductors that are terminated, spliced, or interrupted in any enclosure associated with intrusion system to terminal blocks. Mark each terminal according to system's wiring diagrams. Make all connections with approved crimp-on terminal spade lugs, pressure-type terminal blocks, or plug connectors.

C. Splices, Taps and Terminations: Make connections only on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull, and outlet boxes; terminal cabinets, and equipment enclosures.

D. Identification of Conductors and Cables: Color code conductors and apply wire markers. Coordinate with shop drawings.

3.3 BACKBOARDS

A. Provide plywood backboards on all four walls of each telecommunications room.

B. Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Bottom of plywood is to be six inches above finished floor. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

C. Paint backboards flat white.

3.4 SLEEVES

A. Interior Penetrations of Nonrated Walls, Floors and Ceilings: Provide EMT sleeves. Seal space between the raceway and the wall or floor using joint sealant appropriate for the size, depth and location of the joint. Comply with requirements in Division 07, "Joint Sealants."

B. Fire-Rated Assembly Penetrations: 1. Provide STI "EZ-Path" assemblies for penetrations at walls, partitions and ceilings. 2. Provide EMT sleeves for penetrations and floors. Seal pathway and cable penetration with fire stop materials.

3.5 IDENTIFICATION DEVICES

A. Identify system components, wiring, cabling and terminals according to Division 26, "Identification."

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 270500 - 3 December 15, 2017 3.6 FIRESTOPPING

A. Provide firestopping to penetrations of fire-rated assemblies to restore original fire-resistance rating of assembly.

3.7 AS-BUILT SHOP DRAWINGS

A. At the completion of the project, provide a complete set of as-built shop drawings (hard copy and CD) showing the following as-built: 1. Raceway layout 2. Device locations 3. Device identification numbers

END OF SECTION 270500

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 270500 - 4 December 15, 2017 SECTION 271500 – COMMUNICATIONS HORIZONTAL CABLING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

B. Refer to Division 27, Section 270500, "Common Work Results for Communications," for general requirements that apply to this section. Comply with all requirements of Section 270500.

1.2 DEFINITIONS

A. BICSI: Building Industry Consulting Service International

B. Consolidation Point: A location for interconnection between horizontal cables extending from building pathways and horizontal cables extending into furniture pathways.

C. Cross-Connect: A facility enabling the termination of cable elements and their interconnection or cross-connection.

D. EMI: Electromagnetic interference

E. IDC: Insulation displacement connector

F. Ladder Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of two longitudinal side rails connected by individual transverse members (rungs).

G. LAN: Local area network

H. MUTOA: Multiuser telecommunications outlet assembly; a grouping in one location of several telecommunications outlet/connectors.

I. Outlet/Connectors: A connecting device in the work area on which horizontal cable or outlet cable terminates.

J. RCDD: Registered Communications Distribution Designer

K. Trough or Ventilated Cable Tray: A fabricated structure consisting of longitudinal side rails and a bottom having openings for the passage of air.

L. UTP: Unshielded twisted pair

1.3 HORIZONTAL CABLING DESCRIPTION

A. Horizontal cable and its connecting hardware provide the means of transporting signals between the Telecommunications Room and the horizontal cross-connect located in the communications equipment room. This cabling and its connecting hardware are called "permanent link," a term that is used in the testing protocols.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 271500 - 1 December 15, 2017 1. TIA/EIA-568-B.1 requires that a minimum of two telecommunications outlet/connectors be installed for each work area. 2. Horizontal cabling shall contain no more that one transition point or consolidation point between the horizontal cross-connect and the telecommunications outlet/connector. 3. Bridged taps and splices shall not be installed in the horizontal cabling. 4. Splitters shall not be installed as part of the optical fiber cabling.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. General Performance: Horizontal cabling system shall comply with transmission standards in TIA/EIA-568-B.1 when tested according to test procedures of this standard.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. It shall be understood that the Electrical and Telecommunications details and drawings provided with the specifications package are diagrammatic. They are included to show the intent of the specifications and to aid the telecommunications contractor in bidding the job.

B. The telecommunications contractor shall submit complete system shop drawings for approval. The shop drawings shall provide the following information as a minimum: 1. Complete low-voltage pathway layout. 2. Riser diagram showing the fiber and copper connections between the Main Entrance Room (MER) and each Telecommunications Room (TR). 3. Elevation of all walls in the Main Entrance Room (MER) and each Telecommunications Room (TR) showing the location of all wall-mounted equipment, cable tray, etc. 4. Elevation of each equipment rack showing the patch panels and wire management. Provide a matrix for each patch panel showing the jack number of each port. 5. Floor plan showing the location of each telecommunications outlet with the associated jack numbers. 6. Sample faceplate with jack labels. 7. Shop drawings shall utilize the final room numbers established by the Owner, not the room and building numbers shown on the Architectural Floor Plans.

C. Submittal information shall include the name of each Leviton authorized installer who may be used in the conduct of the project, and evidence of certification.

1.6 COORDINATION

A. Coordinate layout and installation of telecommunications pathways and cabling with Owner's telecommunications and LAN equipment and service suppliers.

B. Coordinate telecommunications outlet/connector locations with location of power receptacles at each work area.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 271500 - 2 December 15, 2017 2.1 PATHWAYS

A. General Requirements: Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A.

B. Cable Support: NRTL labeled for support of Category 6 cabling, designed to prevent degradation of cable performance and pinch points that could damage cable. 1. Support brackets with cable tie slots for fastening cable ties to brackets. 2. Lacing bars, spools, junction hooks and D-rings. 3. Straps and other devices.

C. Cable Trays: Comply with the requirements of Division 26.

D. Conduit and Boxes: Comply with requirements in Division 26, Section 260533, "Raceway and Boxes."

2.2 UTP CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company 2. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand 3. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. Description: 100-ohm, four-pair UTP, formed into 25-pair binder groups covered with a blue thermoplastic jacket. 1. Comply with ICEA S-90-661 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, Category 6. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction as complying with UL 444 and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Communications, Plenum Rated: Type CMP, complying with NFPA 262. b. Multipurpose, Plenum Rated: Type MPP, complying with NFPA 262.

2.3 UTP CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Panduit Corp. 2. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. General Requirements for Cable Connecting Hardware: Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2, IDC type with modules designed for punch-down caps or tools. Cables shall be terminated with connecting hardware of same category or higher.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 271500 - 3 December 15, 2017 C. Connecting Blocks: 110-style IDC for Category 6. Provide blocks for the number of cables terminated on the block, plus 25 percent spare. Integral with connector bodies, including plugs and jacks where indicated.

D. Cross-Connect: Modular array of connecting blocks arranged to terminate building cables and permit interconnection between cables. One terminal per field for each conductor in assigned cables.

E. Patch Panel: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered jack units with IDC-type connectors at each jack for permanent termination of pair groups of installed cables. One jack per field for each four-pair UTP cable indicated.

F. Jacks and Jack Assemblies: Modular, color-coded, eight-position modular receptacle units with integral IDC-type terminals.

G. Patch Cords: Factory-made, four-pair cables in 36-inch lengths; terminated with eight-position modular plug at each end. 1. Patch cords shall have bend-relief-compliant boots and color-coded icons to ensure Category 6 performance. Patch cords shall have latch guards to protect against snagging. 2. Patch cords shall have color-coded boots for circuit identification.

2.4 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company 2. SYSTIMAX Solutions; a CommScope, Inc. brand 3. Tyco Electronics/AMP Netconnect; Tyco International Ltd.

B. Description: Multimode, 62.5/125-micrometer, 24-fiber, nonconductive, tight buffer, optical fiber cable. 1. Comply with ICEA S-83-596 for mechanical properties. 2. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3 for performance specifications. 3. Comply with TIA/EIA-492AAAA-B for detailed specifications. 4. Listed and labeled by an NRTL acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction as complying with UL 444, UL 1651, and NFPA 70 for the following types: a. Plenum Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNP, complying with NFPA 262. b. Riser Rated, Nonconductive: Type OFNR, complying with UL 1666. 5. Maximum Attenuation: 3.50 dB/km at 850 nm; 1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm. 6. Minimum Modal Bandwidth: 160 MHz-km at 850 nm; 500 MHz-km at 1300 nm.

C. Jacket: 1. Jacket Color: Orange for 62.5/125-micrometer cable. 2. Cable cordage jacket, fiber, unit, and group color shall be according to TIA/EIA-598-B.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 271500 - 4 December 15, 2017 3. Imprinted with fiber count, fiber type, and aggregate length at regular intervals not to exceed 40 inches.

2.5 OPTICAL FIBER CABLE HARDWARE

A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: 1. Berk-Tek; a Nexans company 2. Corning Cable Systems

B. Cross-Connects and Patch Panels: Modular panels housing multiple-numbered, duplex cable connectors. Number of connectors per field: One for each fiber of cable or cables assigned to field, plus spares and blank positions adequate to suit specified expansion criteria.

C. Patch Cords: Factory-made, dual-fiber cables in 36-inch lengths.

D. Cable Connecting Hardware: 1. Comply with Optical Fiber Connector Intermateability Standards (FOCIS) specifications of TIA/EIA-604-2, TIA/EIA-604-3-A, and TIA/EIA-604-12. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. 2. Quick-connect, simplex and duplex, Type SC connectors. Insertion loss not more than 0.75 dB. 3. Type SFF connectors may be used in termination racks, panels, and equipment packages.

2.6 TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET/CONNECTORS

A. Jacks: 100-ohm, balanced, twisted-pair connector; four-pair, eight-position modular. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

B. Workstation Outlets: Four-port-connector assemblies mounted in single faceplate. 1. Plastic Faceplate: High-impact plastic. Coordinate color with Division 26, Section 262726, "Wiring Devices." 2. Snap-in jacks accommodating any combination of UTP, optical fiber, and coaxial work area cords. a. Flush mounting jacks, positioning the cord at a 45-degree angle. b. Legend: Machine printed in the field using adhesive-tape label. 3. Legend: Snap-in, clear-label covers and machine-printed paper inserts.

2.7 GROUNDING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 26, Section 260526, "Grounding and Bonding" for grounding conductors and connectors.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 271500 - 5 December 15, 2017 2.8 IDENTIFICATION PRODUCTS

A. Comply with TIA/EIA-606-A and UL 969 for labeling materials, including label stocks, laminating adhesives, and inks used by label printers.

B. Comply with requirements in Division 26, Section 260553, "Identification."

2.9 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to evaluate cables.

B. Factory test UTP and optical fiber cables on reels according to TIA/EIA-568-B.1.

C. Factory test UTP cables according to TIA/EIA-568-B.2.

D. Factory test multimode optical fiber cables according to TIA/EIA-526-14-A and TIA/EIA-568- B.3.

E. Factory-sweep test coaxial cables at frequencies from 5 MHz to 1 GHz. Sweep test shall test the frequency response or attenuation over frequency, of a cable by generating a voltage whose frequency is varied through the specified frequency range and graphing the results.

F. Cable will be considered defective if it does not pass tests and inspections.

G. Prepare test and inspection reports.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 ENTRANCE FACILITIES

A. Coordinate backbone cabling with the protectors and demarcation point provided by communications service provider.

3.2 WIRING METHODS

A. Wiring Method: Install cables in raceways and cable trays except within consoles, cabinets, desks, and counters. Conceal raceway and cables except in unfinished spaces. 1. Install plenum cable in environmental air spaces, including plenum ceilings. 2. Comply with requirements for raceways and boxes specified in Division 26, Section 260533, "Raceway and Boxes."

B. Wiring Method: Conceal conductors and cables in accessible ceilings, walls, and floors where possible.

C. Wiring within Enclosures: Bundle, lace and train cables to terminal points with no excess and without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii. Provide and use lacing bars and distribution spools.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 271500 - 6 December 15, 2017 3.3 INSTALLATION OF PATHWAYS

A. Cable Trays: Comply with NEMA VE 2 and TIA/EIA-569-A-7.

B. Comply with requirements for demarcation point, pathways, cabinets, and racks specified in Division 27, Section 271100, "Communications Equipment Room Fittings." Drawings indicate general arrangement of pathways and fittings.

C. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A for pull-box sizing and length of conduit and number of bends between pull points.

D. Comply with requirements in Division 26, Section 260533, "Raceway and Boxes" for installation of conduits and wireways.

E. Install manufactured conduit sweeps and long-radius elbows whenever possible.

F. Pathway Installation in Communications Equipment Rooms: 1. Position conduit ends adjacent to a corner on backboard where a single piece of plywood is installed, or in the corner of room where multiple sheets of plywood are installed around perimeter walls of room. 2. Install cable trays to route cables if conduits cannot be located in these positions. 3. Secure conduits to backboard when entering room from overhead. 4. Extend conduits three inches above finished floor. 5. Install metal conduits with grounding bushings and connect with grounding conductor to grounding system.

G. Backboards: Install backboards with 96-inch dimension vertical. Butt adjacent sheets tightly, and form smooth gap-free corners and joints.

3.4 INSTALLATION OF CABLES

A. Comply with NECA 1.

B. General Requirements for Cabling: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.1. 2. Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 6, "Cable Termination Practices." 3. Install 110-style IDC termination hardware unless otherwise indicated. 4. MUTOA shall not be used as a cross-connect point. 5. Consolidation points may be used only for making a direct connection to telecommunications outlet/connectors: a. Do not use consolidation point as a cross-connect point, a patch connection, or for direct connection to workstation equipment. b. Locate consolidation points for UTP at least 49 feet from communications equipment room.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 271500 - 7 December 15, 2017 c. Terminate conductors; no cable shall contain unterminated elements. Make terminations only at indicated outlets, terminals, cross-connects, and patch panels. 6. Cables may not be spliced. Secure and support cables at intervals not exceeding 30 inches and not more than six inches from cabinets, boxes, fittings, outlets, racks, frames and terminals. 7. Install lacing bars to restrain cables, to prevent straining connections, and to prevent bending cables to smaller radii than minimums recommended by manufacturer. 8. Bundle, lace and train conductors to terminal points without exceeding manufacturer's limitations on bending radii, but not less than radii specified in BICSI ITSIM, "Cabling Termination Practices" Chapter. Install lacing bars and distribution spools. 9. Do not install bruised, kinked, scored, deformed or abraded cable. Do not splice cable between termination, tap, or junction points. Remove and discard cable if damaged during installation and replace it with new cable. 10. Cold-Weather Installation: Bring cable to room temperature before dereeling. Heat lamps shall not be used for heating. 11. Install a 10-foot-long service loop on each end of cable In the communications equipment room. 12. Pulling Cable: Comply with BICSI ITSIM, Ch. 4, "Pulling Cable." Monitor cable pull tensions.

C. UTP Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.2. 2. Do not untwist UTP cables more than 1/2 inch from the point of termination to maintain cable geometry.

D. Optical Fiber Cable Installation: 1. Comply with TIA/EIA-568-B.3. 2. Cable may be terminated on connecting hardware that is rack or cabinet mounted.

E. Open-Cable Installation: 1. Install cabling with horizontal and vertical cable guides in telecommunications spaces with terminating hardware and interconnection equipment.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 271500 - 8 December 15, 2017 2. Suspend UTP cable not in a wireway or pathway a minimum of eight inches above ceilings by cable supports not more than 60 inches apart. 3. Cable shall not be run through structural members or in contact with pipes, ducts, or other potentially damaging items.

F. Installation of Cable Routed Exposed under Raised Floors: 1. Install plenum-rated cable only. 2. Install cabling after the flooring system has been installed in raised floor areas. 3. Coil cable six feet long, not less than 12 inches in diameter below each feed point.

G. Outdoor Coaxial Cable Installation: 1. Install outdoor connections in enclosures complying with NEMA 250, Type 4X. Install corrosion-resistant connectors with properly designed O-rings to keep out moisture. 2. Attach antenna lead-in cable to support structure at intervals not exceeding 36 inches.

H. Group connecting hardware for cables into separate logical fields.

I. Separation from EMI Sources: 1. Comply with BICSI TDMM and TIA/EIA-569-A for separating unshielded copper voice and data communication cable from potential EMI sources, including electrical power lines and equipment. 2. Separation between open communications cables or cables in nonmetallic raceways and unshielded power conductors and electrical equipment shall be as follows: a. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2kVA: A minimum of five inches. b. Electrical Equipment Rating Between 2 and 5kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. c. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5kVA: A minimum of 24 inches. d. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and unshielded power lines or electrical equipment shall be as follows: e. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2kVA: A minimum of 2-1/2 inches. f. Electrical Equipment Rating Between 2 and 5kVA: A minimum of six inches. g. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5kVA: A minimum of 12 inches. h. Separation between communications cables in grounded metallic raceways and power lines and electrical equipment located in grounded metallic conduits or enclosures shall be as follows: i. Electrical Equipment Rating Less Than 2kVA: No requirement. j. Electrical Equipment Rating Between 2 and 5kVA: A minimum of three inches. k. Electrical Equipment Rating More Than 5kVA: A minimum of six inches. Separation between Communications Cables and Electrical Motors and Transformers, 5kVA or HP and Larger: A minimum of 48 inches. 3. Separation between Communications Cables and Fluorescent Fixtures: A minimum of five inches.

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 271500 - 9 December 15, 2017 3.5 FIRESTOPPING

A. Comply with requirements in Division 07, Section 078413, "Penetration Firestopping."

B. Comply with TIA/EIA-569-A, Annex A, "Firestopping."

C. Comply with BICSI TDMM, "Firestopping Systems" Article.

3.6 GROUNDING

A. Install grounding according to BICSI TDMM, "Grounding, Bonding, and Electrical Protection" Chapter.

B. Comply with ANSI-J-STD-607-A.

C. Locate grounding bus bar to minimize the length of bonding conductors. Fasten to wall allowing at least two-inch clearance behind the grounding bus bar. Connect grounding bus bar with a minimum No. 4 AWG grounding electrode conductor from grounding bus bar to suitable electrical building ground.

D. Bond metallic equipment to the grounding bus bar, using not smaller than No. 6 AWG equipment grounding conductor.

3.7 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify system components, wiring, and cabling complying with TIA/EIA-606-A. Comply with requirements for identification specified in Division 26, Section 260553, "Identification." 1. Administration Class: 1. 2. Color-code cross-connect fields. Apply colors to voice and data service backboards, connections, covers and labels.

B. Using cable management system software specified in Part 2, develop Cabling Administration Drawings for system identification, testing and management. Use unique alphanumeric designation for each cable and label cable, jacks, connectors and terminals to which it connects with same designation. Cable and asset management software shall reflect final as-built conditions.

C. Comply with requirements in Division 09, Section 099123, "Interior Painting" for painting backboards. Do not paint over manufacturer's label for fire-resistant plywood.

D. Paint and label colors for equipment identification shall comply with TIA/EIA-606-A for Class 2 level of administration.

E. Cable Schedule: Post in prominent location in each equipment room and wiring closet. List incoming and outgoing cables and their designations, origins and destinations. Protect with rigid frame and clear plastic cover. Furnish an electronic copy of final comprehensive schedules for project.

F. Cabling Administration Drawings: Show building floor plans with cabling administration-point labeling. Identify labeling convention and show labels for telecommunications closets; backbone

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 271500 - 10 December 15, 2017 pathways and cables; entrance pathways and cables; terminal hardware and positions, horizontal cables, work areas and workstation terminal positions; grounding buses and pathways; and equipment grounding conductors. Follow convention of TIA/EIA-606-A. Furnish electronic record of all drawings in software and format selected by Owner.

G. Cable and Wire Identification: 1. Label each cable within four inches of each termination and tap where it is accessible in a cabinet, junction or outlet box, and elsewhere as indicated. 2. Each wire connected to building-mounted devices is not required to be numbered at device if color of wire is consistent with associated wire connected and numbered within panel or cabinet. 3. Exposed Cables and Cables in Cable Trays and Wire Troughs: Label each cable at intervals not exceeding 15 feet. 4. Label each terminal strip and screw terminal in each cabinet, rack or panel. a. Individually number wiring conductors connected to terminal strips, and identify each cable or wiring group being extended from a panel or cabinet to a building-mounted device with name and number of particular device shown. b. Label each unit and field within distribution racks and frames. c. Identification within Connector Fields in Equipment Rooms and Wiring Closets: Label each connector and each discrete unit of cable-terminating and connecting hardware. Use a different color for jacks and plugs of each service where similar jacks and plugs are used for both voice and data communication cabling. 5. Uniquely identify and label work area cables extending from the MUTOA to the work area. These cables may not exceed the length stated on the MUTOA label.

H. Labels shall be preprinted or computer-printed type with printing area and font color that contrasts with cable jacket color, but still complies with requirements in TIA/EIA-606-A. Cables use flexible vinyl or polyester that flex as cables are bent.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Engage a factory-authorized service representative to train Owner's maintenance personnel in cable-plant management operations, including changing signal pathways for different workstations, rerouting signals in failed cables, and keeping records of cabling assignments and revisions when extending wiring to establish new workstation outlets.

END OF SECTION 271500

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 271500 - 11 December 15, 2017

THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK

USDA APHIS Moore Air Base BAS 271500 - 12 December 15, 2017

Request for Information (RFI)

Project Information Request for Information Project # RFI # Drawing Title APHIS Moore Air Base New BAS System Date Spec. Section Address 22675 N. Moorefield Rd Due Date Location Other City, State, Zip Edinburg, TX 78541 Priority Country USA Subject Reason

From To Contact Contact Company Company Address Address

City, State, Zip City, State, Zip Country Country Phone Phone Fax Fax

Request Example RFI Form Suggestion Example RFI Form

Response

Example RFI Form

______Signature

Page 1 of 1 data sheet JACE 8000 IO R

PRODUCT DEFINITION SPECIFICATIONS

IO R is part of VYKON’s portfolio of hardware, software and Niagara 4 – Requires Niagara 4.3 or later tools designed for remote monitoring and control applications Niagara AX – Requires Niagara 3.8u3 or later that enables end-to-end automation and device-to-enterprise integration. IO R allows the JACE® 8000 to interface directly IO-R-16 with simple non-intelligent inputs and outputs remotely located 8 Universal inputs: Type 3 (10k) up to 4,000 feet from the JACE. The connection is established thermistors, 0-100K ohm, 0-10VDC, via an industry-standard RS 485 multi-drop communications 0-20 mA with external resistor bus. Multiple IO R devices can be utilized on a single JACE, providing 250+ IO points on a single JACE. 4 Relay outputs (Form A contacts, 24VAC @ .5 amp rated)

4 Analog outputs (0-10VDC) IO-R-16 IO-R-34 Powered from IO-R-34

Connected to JACE 8000 remotely over a shielded RS485 bus

IO-R-34

16 Universal inputs: Type 3 (10k) thermistors, 0-100K ohm, 0-10VDC, 0-20 mA with external resistor

10 Relay outputs (Form A contacts, 24VAC @ .5 amp rated)

8 Analog outputs (0-10VDC)

Powered from a 24VAC/DC source

Can power up to 4 IO-R-16 modules

Connected to JACE 8000 remotely over a shielded RS485 bus

powered by

framework® EXPANDABILITY

MAXIMUM EXPANSION POWER

• (8) IO-R-34s One IO-R-34 can power four IO-R-16 modules or • (16) IO-R-16s

COMMON CONFIGURATIONS Maximum configuration Maximum configuration Maximum configuration for 2 panels for 4 panels for 8 panels

Shown with maximum of 4 IO-R-16s per IO-R-34

AGENCY CERTIFICATIONS

• UL 916 • FCC part 15, class b • China ROHS • C-UL • RoHS2 • Open Energy • CE EN 61326-1:2013 • REACH Management Class 2 • RCM • WEEE

ENVIRONMENTAL SPECIFICATIONS

• Operating temperature: -20–60°C • Shipping & vibration: ASTM D4169, Assurance Level II • Storage temperature: -40–85°C • MTTF: 10 years+ • Humidity: 5%–95% — Non condensing MOUNTING & DIMENSIONS The JACE 8000 IO modules support mounting on EN50022 standard 7.5mm x 35mm DIN rail or panel mounting.

IO-R-16

82.5mm (w) x 116mm (h) x 61mm (d) (3.25 in x 4.5 in x 2.4 in)

2.4" (61mm) 3.25" (82.5mm)

3.31" (84mm) 4.5" (116mm)

3.85" (97mm)

IO-R-34

162mm (w) x 116mm (h) x 61mm (d) (6.8 in x 4.5 in x 2.4 in)

2.4" (61mm) 6.8" 162mm)

3.31" (84mm) 4.5" (116mm)

7" (178mm) ORDERING INFORMATION

Part number Description

IO-R-16 16 Point IO Module. Powered by IO-R-34. Connected to JACE® 8000 remotely over RS485.

34 Point IO Module. Powered by 24VAC. Capable of powering 4 IO-R-16 modules. IO-R-34 Connected to JACE 8000 remotely over RS485.

NIAGARA FOR REMOTE MONITORING APPLICATIONS

JACE® 8000 IO module Fan

To learn more about how to purchase, install and start using the JACE 8000 IO R, contact your VYKON partner. The global community of certified Niagara professionals can serve your unique business needs across any industry or geographic region.

vykon.com

© 2017 Tridium Inc. All rights reserved. All other trademarks and registered trademarks are properties of their respective owners.

Information and/or specifications published here are current as of the date of publication of this document. Tridium, Inc. reserves the right to change or modify specifications without prior notice. The latest product specifications can be found by contacting our corporate headquarters, Richmond, Virginia. Products or features contained herein may be covered by one or more U.S. or foreign patents. This document may be copied only as expressly authorized by Tridium in writing. It may not otherwise, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form.

2017-0012VK data sheet

supervisor

PRODUCT DEFINITION The Niagara 4 Supervisor is an IoT (Internet of Things) software platform used in server-class applications. It makes managing all buildings at an KEY ADVANTAGES enterprise level possible, giving facilities managers the ability to quickly • Centralized system management respond to problems and insights to optimize their system. • Quickly navigate to individual The Niagara 4 Supervisor allows multiple Niagara-based JACE® controllers, buildings using tags to diagnose along with other IP-based controllers and field devices, to be networked problems together. It serves real-time graphical information to standard Web-browser clients and provides server-level functions. These functions include • Compare data between buildings centralized data logging/trending, archiving to external databases, alarming, dashboarding, system navigation, master scheduling, database management, • Export system data to external and integration with other enterprise software applications through an databases XML interface (oBIX standard). Also, it provides a comprehensive graphical • Integrate BAS to other enterprise engineering toolset for application development. applications

ORDERING INFORMATION • Integrate to other applications,

Part number Description such as work order management, S-N4-0 No Niagara network – Devices only (18mo SMA req) analytics, etc. SUP-0-SMA-INIT 18mo initial SMA (3YR or 5YR can be substituted) • Single tool used to program JACE S-N4-1 1 Niagara network connection (18mo SMA req) controllers and Supervisor SUP-1-SMA-INIT 18mo initial SMA (3YR or 5YR can be substituted) S-N4-2 2 Niagara network connections (18mo SMA req) • Remotely back up JACE SUP-2-SMA-INIT 18mo initial SMA (3YR or 5YR can be substituted) applications to Supervisor S-N4-3 3 Niagara network connections (18mo SMA req) SUP-3-SMA-INIT 18mo initial SMA (3YR or 5YR can be substituted) • Batch provisioning of JACE S-N4-10 10 Niagara network connections (18mo SMA req) firmware upgrades from Supervisor SUP-10-SMA-INIT 18mo initial SMA (3YR or 5YR can be substituted) • Robust built-in analytic S-N4-100 100 Niagara network connections (18mo SMA req) capabilities supported by SUP-100-SMA-INIT 18mo initial SMA (3YR or 5YR can be substituted) standard Niagara components S-N4-UNL Unlimited Niagara network connections (18mo SMA req) and visualizations SUP-UNL-SMA-INIT 18mo initial SMA (3YR or 5YR can be substituted) SUP-DEMO Niagara 4 Supervisor demo • Compatibility with VYKON S-N4-UP-1 Adds one additional Niagara connection to Niagara 4 Supervisor Integrated Analytics 2.0, adding S-N4-UP-100 Upgrades small Niagara 4 Supervisor to 100 Niagara connections data source, functional and S-N4-UP-UNL Upgrades Niagara 4 Supervisor 100 to unlimited Niagara connections mathematical programming SUP-DEVICE-10 Adds 10 Non-Niagara IP Devices to a Niagara 4 Supervisor blocks to enable sophisticated SUP-DEVICE-25 Adds 25 Non-Niagara IP Devices to a Niagara 4 Supervisor analytic algorithms SUP-DEVICE-50 Adds 50 Non-Niagara IP Devices to a Niagara 4 Supervisor SUP-DEVICE-100 Adds 100 Non-Niagara IP Devices to a Niagara 4 Supervisor SUP-DEVICE-200 Adds 200 Non-Niagara IP Devices to a Niagara 4 Supervisor

SUP-AX Enables a Niagara 4 Supervisor to run Niagara AX (v3.8) powered by SUP-[0-UNL]-SMA-[1,3,5]YR Supervisor [0-UNL] Maintenance – [1,3,5] YR extensions

*If Maintenance coverage is not purchased for any period, the price of Maintenance for the next period for which it is purchased will be (i) the Maintenance fee for the period(s) for which Maintenance was not purchased, up to a maximum of 5 years; and (ii) the Maintenance fee for the next year. framework® SUPPORTED DRIVERS SPECIFICATIONS Many open protocol IP drivers are included with Niagara 4. Others can be HTML5 and Java-enabled user interface (UI); purchased separately à la carte. For an up-to-date list of supported drivers, JavaScript data interface library included visit our resource library on vykon.com. (BajaScript)

Supports an unlimited number of users over COMPATIBILITY the Internet / intranet with a standard Web browser (depending on the host PC resources) In any given Niagara system, the Niagara Supervisor must be running the Optional enterprise-level data archival highest version of any Niagara instance in the architecture. using SQL, MySQL or Oracle databases and HTTP/HTML/XML, CSV or text formats When connecting to JACEs that are running older versions of Niagara, these compatibility guidelines apply: “Audit Trail” of database changes, database storage and backup, global time functions, • Niagara AX: Niagara 4 Supervisors can connect to JACEs running Niagara calendar, central scheduling, control and energy management routines AX versions 3.6u4, 3.7u1, 3.8R and higher. Sophisticated alarm processing and routing, • R2: Niagara AX and Niagara 4 Supervisors can connect to JACEs running including email alarm acknowledging R2 through the oBIX XML interface only. oBIX is included in all Niagara Access to alarms, logs, graphics, schedules AX and Niagara 4 Supervisors as a means of integrating Niagara-based and configuration data with a standard Release 2 (R2) JACEs. With Niagara Release 2.3.522 or higher, the oBIX Web browser driver can be added to expose all data points, schedules, trends and Niagara follows industry best practices for alarms to a Niagara AX or Niagara 4 system. This oBIX driver is both a cyber security, with support for features client and a server. such as strong hashed passwords, TLSv1 for secure communications and certificate management tools for authentication PLATFORM REQUIREMENTS FOR NIAGARA 4.2 HTML-based help system that includes Niagara 4 Supervisors may run acceptably on lower-rated platforms, or comprehensive online system documentation may even require more powerful platforms, depending on the application, Supports multiple Niagara-based stations number of data points integrated, data poll rate, number of concurrent users, connected to a local Ethernet network, or performance expectations, etc. the Internet

• Processor: Intel® Xeon® CPU E5-2640 x64 (or better), compatible Provides online/offline use of the Niagara Framework® Workbench AX graphical with dual- and quad-core processors configuration tool and a comprehensive Java Object Library • Operating System: Windows 10, 64-bit Windows 8.1 Enterprise, 2012 R2 Standard, RHEL-7 Optional direct Ethernet-based driver support for most Open IP field bus protocols (see supported drivers document) • Memory: 1 GB minimum, 4 GB or more recommended for larger systems

• Hard Drive: 4 GB minimum, more recommended depending on archiving requirements

• Display: Video card and monitor capable of displaying 1024 x 768 pixel resolution or greater

• Network Support: Ethernet adapter (10/100 Mb with RJ-45 connector) To learn more about how to • Connectivity: Full-time high-speed ISP connection recommended for purchase, install and start using remote site access (i.e., T1, ADSL, cable modem) and IPv6 compliant the Niagara 4 Supervisor, contact your VYKON partner. The global Platform requirements for older versions of Niagara Supervisors are included community of certified Niagara in the Release Notes for each particular version. professionals can serve your unique business needs across any industry or geographic region.

vykon.com

Copyright © 2016 Tridium Inc. All rights reserved. Intel and Xeon are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.

Information and/or specifications published here are current as of the date of publication of this document. Tridium, Inc. reserves the right to change or modify specifications without prior notice. The latest product specifications can be found by contacting our corporate headquarters, Richmond, Virginia. Products or features contained herein may be covered by one or more U.S. or foreign patents. This document may be copied only as expressly authorized by Tridium in writing. It may not otherwise, in whole or in part, be copied, photocopied, reproduced, translated, or reduced to any electronic medium or machine-readable form.

2016-0010VK https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2867199

Antenna - RAD-ISM-900-ANT-OMNI-5 - 2867199 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)

Omnidirectional antenna, 900 MHz, gain: 7 dBi, polarization: linear, opening angle: h/v 360°/30°, degree of protection: IP65, connection: N (female), incl. mounting bracket and mast clips

Why buy this product

For freely mobile applications For multipoint or mesh connections

Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 STK Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 546.000 g Custom tariff number 85177019 Country of origin United States

Technical data

Dimensions Width 0.3 cm Height 60.9 cm Ambient conditions Degree of protection IP65 Ambient temperature (operation) -40 °C ... 80 °C General With connecting cable No Frequency range 900 MHz 900 MHz Horizontal beamwidth 360 °

09/15/2017 Page 1 / 3 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2867199

Antenna - RAD-ISM-900-ANT-OMNI-5 - 2867199

Technical data

General Vertical beamwidth 30 ° Polarization Linear vertical Impedance 50 Ω Gain 7 dBi Wind velocity 160 km/h Connection method N (female) Material galvanized sheet steel (Bracket) V2A (Mast clip) Mounting type Mast mounting or wall mounting External diameter 38 mm ... 57 mm (Mast)

Drawings

Schematic diagram Schematic diagram

Installation example

Classifications eCl@ss

eCl@ss 4.0 27250312 09/15/2017 Page 2 / 3 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2867199

Antenna - RAD-ISM-900-ANT-OMNI-5 - 2867199

Classifications eCl@ss eCl@ss 4.1 27250312 eCl@ss 5.0 19070102 eCl@ss 5.1 19070102 eCl@ss 6.0 19070102 eCl@ss 7.0 19070102 eCl@ss 8.0 19070105 eCl@ss 9.0 19070105 ETIM

ETIM 2.0 EC000416 ETIM 3.0 EC001698 ETIM 4.0 EC001698 ETIM 5.0 EC001698 ETIM 6.0 EC001698 UNSPSC

UNSPSC 6.01 43171611 UNSPSC 7.0901 43221706 UNSPSC 11 43171611 UNSPSC 12.01 43221706 UNSPSC 13.2 43221715

Phoenix Contact 2017 © - all rights reserved http://www.phoenixcontact.com

09/15/2017 Page 3 / 3 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2917188

Control cabinet - RAD-SYS-NEMA4X-900 - 2917188 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)

NEMA 4X enclosure for wireless systems

Product Description NEMA 4X enclosure preconfigured for wireless systems. Includes UPS DC power supply, battery back-up, and surge protection for the antenna.

Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 STK

GTIN

GTIN 4046356462082 Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 7,460.000 g Custom tariff number 85371091 Country of origin United States

Technical data

Note The products are offered exclusively for export outside the EU and the Trade restriction European Economic Area. Dimensions Width 311 mm Height 359 mm Depth 156 mm Ambient conditions Degree of protection NEMA 4X

NEMA 4X enclosure, power supply, UPS, battery back-up and antenna Wireless set surge protection General

09/15/2017 Page 1 / 5 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2917188

Control cabinet - RAD-SYS-NEMA4X-900 - 2917188

Technical data

General Housing material Fiberglass Environmental Product Compliance China RoHS Environmentally Friendly Use Period = 50 For details about hazardous substances go to tab “Downloads”, Category “Manufacturer's declaration”

Articles in set

Uninterruptible power supply - MINI-DC-UPS/24DC/2 - 2866640

Uninterruptible power supply with integrated power supply unit, 2 A, in combination with MINI-BAT/24/DC 0.8 AH or 1.3 AH

Energy storage - MINI-BAT/24DC/0.8AH - 2866666

Energy storage device, lead AGM, VRLA technology, 24 V DC, 0.8 Ah.

Type 3 surge protection plug - PLT-SEC-T3-230-P - 2905235

Replacement plug for type 3 device protection from the PLUGTRAB SEC T3 product range. 230 V nominal voltage.

Surge protection device - CN-UB-70DC-6-BB - 2803166

Attachment plug with surge protection for coaxial signal interfaces. Connection: N connector, female/female

09/15/2017 Page 2 / 5 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2917188

Control cabinet - RAD-SYS-NEMA4X-900 - 2917188

Classifications eCl@ss

eCl@ss 4.0 27250312 eCl@ss 4.1 27250312 eCl@ss 5.0 27061805 eCl@ss 5.1 27061805 eCl@ss 6.0 27061805 eCl@ss 7.0 27061805 eCl@ss 8.0 19179290 eCl@ss 9.0 27180101 ETIM

ETIM 4.0 EC000310 ETIM 5.0 EC000261 ETIM 6.0 EC000310 UNSPSC

UNSPSC 6.01 26121608 UNSPSC 7.0901 26121608 UNSPSC 11 26121608 UNSPSC 12.01 26121608 UNSPSC 13.2 43222604 Accessories

Accessories Assembly element

Mounting material - RAD-SYS-BKT - 2900038

Pole mounting bracket for RAD-SYS-... enclosure systems

Trusted Wireless device

09/15/2017 Page 3 / 5 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2917188

Control cabinet - RAD-SYS-NEMA4X-900 - 2917188

Accessories

Wireless module - RAD-ISM-900-SET-UD-ANT - 2867102

Unidirectional, wireless, 900 MHz transmission system (America), made up of a transmitter (Tx) and a receiver (Rx) and two antennas with connecting cable

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Radioline - 900 MHz wireless transceiver with RS-232/485 interface, can be extended with I/O modules, RSMA (female) antenna connection, point-to-point, star, and mesh networks up to 250 stations, range of up to 32 km (line of sight), use in North America

Wireless module - RAD-ISM-900-EN-BD - 2900016

Wireless transceiver (transmitter and receiver) with Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 interfaces, for 900 MHz ISM band (America). This product is exclusively for export outside of the European Economic Area (EEA).

Wireless module - RAD-ISM-900-EN-BD-BUS - 2900017

Wireless transceiver (transmitter and receiver) with Ethernet, RS-232, RS-485 interfaces and bus foot, for 900 MHz ISM band (America). This product is exclusively for export outside of the European Economic Area (EEA).

Wireless module - RAD-ISM-900-EN-BD/B - 2901205

Wireless transceiver (transmitter and receiver) with Ethernet for 900 MHz ISM band (America). This is a slave-only device that communicates with either the RAD-ISM-900-EN-BD or RAD-ISM-900-EN-BD-BUS configured as the master. This product is exclusively for export outside of the European Economic Area (EEA).

09/15/2017 Page 4 / 5 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2917188

Phoenix Contact 2017 © - all rights reserved http://www.phoenixcontact.com

09/15/2017 Page 5 / 5 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901537

I/O extension module - RAD-AI4-IFS - 2901537 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)

Radioline - I/O extension module, 4 analog current inputs (0/4 mA ... 20 mA)

Why buy this product

Channel-to-channel electrical isolation Extended temperature range, -40 °C ... +70 °C Easy module replacement even during operation (hot swap) Easy startup via thumbwheel Approved for use in zone 2

Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 STK

GTIN

GTIN 4046356610476 Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 220.000 g Custom tariff number 85177000 Country of origin Germany

Technical data

Note EMC: class A product, see manufacturer's declaration in the download Utilization restriction area Dimensions Width 17.5 mm

09/15/2017 Page 1 / 4 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901537

I/O extension module - RAD-AI4-IFS - 2901537

Technical data

Dimensions Height 99 mm Depth 114.5 mm Ambient conditions Degree of protection IP20 Ambient temperature (operation) -40 °C ... 70 °C (>55°C derating) -40 °F ... 158 °F (>131°F derating) Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 85 °C -40 °F ... 185 °F Permissible humidity (operation) 20 % ... 85 % Permissible humidity (storage/transport) 20 % ... 85 % Altitude 2000 m Vibration (operation) in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6: 5g, 10 Hz ... 150 Hz Shock 16g, 11 ms General Overvoltage category II Mounting position any Assembly instructions on standard DIN rail NS 35 in accordance with EN 60715 Degree of pollution 2 Housing material PA 6.6-FR Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0 771 Years (Telcordia standard, 25°C temperature, 21% operating cycle (5 MTTF days a week, 8 hours a day)) 351 Years (Telcordia standard, 40°C temperature, 34.25% operating cycle (5 days a week, 12 hours a day)) 136 Years (Telcordia standard, temperature 40 °C, operating cycle 100 % (7 days a week, 24 hours a day)) Supply Supply voltage range 19.2 V DC ... 30.5 V DC (DIN rail connector) Max. current consumption ≤ 120 mA (At 24 V DC, at 25°C) Transient surge protection Yes Analog inputs Number of inputs 4 Current input signal 0 mA ... 20 mA (can be set via DIP switches) 4 mA ... 20 mA (can be set via DIP switches) Max. current input signal 22 mA Input resistance current input < 70 Ω

09/15/2017 Page 2 / 4 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901537

I/O extension module - RAD-AI4-IFS - 2901537

Technical data

Analog inputs Precision ≤ 0.02 % (at 25 °C) Temperature coefficient, typical 0.0025 %/K (at -40 °C ... +70 °C) Supply voltage ≥ 12 V DC (For passive sensors (via terminal PWR1, +I1)) Resolution 16 bit Protective circuit Short-circuit and overload protection Electrical isolation 50 V (Rated insulation voltage (in each case between the TBUS analog Analog I/O outputs / supply, reinforced insulation according to EN 61010)) Test voltage Analog I/O 1.5 kV AC (50 Hz, 1 min.) Connection data Connection method Screw connection Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm² Conductor cross section solid max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.2 mm² Conductor cross section flexible max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section AWG min. 24 Conductor cross section AWG max. 14 Stripping length 7 mm Tightening torque 0.6 Nm Screw thread M3 Status indicator Status display Green LED (supply voltage, PWR) Green LED (bus communication, DAT) Red LED (periphery error, ERR) Standards and Regulations Electromagnetic compatibility Conformance with EMC Directive 2014/30/EU Standard designation EMC Directive 2014/30/EU Standards/regulations EN 61000-6-2 Standard designation EMC Directive 2014/30/EU Standards/regulations EN 61000-6-4 Standard designation Ex Directive (ATEX) Standards/regulations EN 60079-0 Standard designation Ex Directive (ATEX) Standards/regulations EN-60079-15

09/15/2017 Page 3 / 4 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901537

I/O extension module - RAD-AI4-IFS - 2901537

Technical data

Standards and Regulations Noise emission EN 61000-6-4 Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2 Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0 Shock 16g, 11 ms Vibration (operation) in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6: 5g, 10 Hz ... 150 Hz Conformance CE-compliant ATEX  II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc IECEx Ex nA IIC T4 Gc UL, USA/Canada UL 508 Listed Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D T4A Class I, Zone 2, IIC T4 Noxious gas test ISA-S71.04-1985 G3 Harsh Group A Environmental Product Compliance China RoHS Environmentally Friendly Use Period = 50 For details about hazardous substances go to tab “Downloads”, Category “Manufacturer's declaration”

Articles in set

Electronic housing - ME 17,5 TBUS 1,5/ 5-ST-3,81 GN - 2709561

DIN rail connector for DIN rail mounting. Universal for TBUS housing. Gold-plated contacts, 5-pos.

Phoenix Contact 2017 © - all rights reserved http://www.phoenixcontact.com

09/15/2017 Page 4 / 4 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901538

I/O extension module - RAD-AO4-IFS - 2901538 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)

Radioline - I/O extension module, 4 analog current or voltage outputs (0/4 mA ... 20 mA, 0 V ... 10 V)

Why buy this product

Channel-to-channel electrical isolation Extended temperature range, -40 °C ... +70 °C Easy module replacement even during operation (hot swap) Easy startup via thumbwheel Approved for use in zone 2

Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 STK

GTIN

GTIN 4046356609166 Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 220.000 g Custom tariff number 85177000 Country of origin Germany

Technical data

Note EMC: class A product, see manufacturer's declaration in the download Utilization restriction area Dimensions Width 17.5 mm

09/15/2017 Page 1 / 10 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901538

I/O extension module - RAD-AO4-IFS - 2901538

Technical data

Dimensions Height 99 mm Depth 114.5 mm Ambient conditions Degree of protection IP20 Ambient temperature (operation) -40 °C ... 70 °C (>55°C derating) -40 °F ... 158 °F (>131°F derating) Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 85 °C -40 °F ... 185 °F Permissible humidity (operation) 20 % ... 85 % Permissible humidity (storage/transport) 20 % ... 85 % Altitude 2000 m Vibration (operation) in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6: 5g, 10 Hz ... 150 Hz Shock 16g, 11 ms General Overvoltage category II Mounting position any Assembly instructions on standard DIN rail NS 35 in accordance with EN 60715 Degree of pollution 2 Housing material PA 6.6-FR Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0 999 Years (Telcordia standard, 25°C temperature, 21% operating cycle (5 MTTF days a week, 8 hours a day)) 404 Years (Telcordia standard, 40°C temperature, 34.25% operating cycle (5 days a week, 12 hours a day)) 156 Years (Telcordia standard, temperature 40 °C, operating cycle 100 % (7 days a week, 24 hours a day)) Supply Supply voltage range 19.2 V DC ... 30.5 V DC (DIN rail connector) Max. current consumption ≤ 115 mA (At 24 V DC, at 25°C) Transient surge protection Yes Analog outputs Number of outputs 4 Voltage output signal 0 V ... 10 V Max. voltage output signal approx. 10.83 V Load ≥ 10 kΩ Precision typ. 0.5 % (Voltage output)

09/15/2017 Page 2 / 10 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901538

I/O extension module - RAD-AO4-IFS - 2901538

Technical data

Analog outputs Current output signal 0 mA ... 20 mA 4 mA ... 20 mA Max. current output signal approx. 21.67 mA Load ≤ 500 Ω Precision ≤ 0.02 % (at 25 °C) Resolution 16 bit Temperature coefficient, typical 0.0025 %/K (at -40 °C ... +70 °C) Behavior of the outputs (adjustable via DIP switch) Hold / Reset Protective circuit Transient protection of outputs Electrical isolation 50 V (Rated insulation voltage (in each case between the TBUS analog Analog I/O outputs / supply, reinforced insulation according to EN 61010)) Test voltage Analog I/O 1.5 kV AC (50 Hz, 1 min.) Connection data Connection method Screw connection Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm² Conductor cross section solid max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.2 mm² Conductor cross section flexible max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section AWG min. 24 Conductor cross section AWG max. 14 Stripping length 7 mm Tightening torque 0.6 Nm Screw thread M3 Status indicator Status display Green LED (supply voltage, PWR) Green LED (bus communication, DAT) Red LED (periphery error, ERR) Standards and Regulations Electromagnetic compatibility Conformance with EMC Directive 2014/30/EU Standard designation EMC Directive 2014/30/EU Standards/regulations EN 61000-6-2 Standard designation EMC Directive 2014/30/EU Standards/regulations EN 61000-6-4

09/15/2017 Page 3 / 10 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901538

I/O extension module - RAD-AO4-IFS - 2901538

Technical data

Standards and Regulations Standard designation Ex Directive (ATEX) Standards/regulations EN 60079-0 Standard designation Ex Directive (ATEX) Standards/regulations EN-60079-15 Noise emission EN 61000-6-4 Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2 Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0 Shock 16g, 11 ms Vibration (operation) in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6: 5g, 10 Hz ... 150 Hz Conformance CE-compliant ATEX  II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc IECEx Ex nA IIC T4 Gc UL, USA/Canada UL 508 Listed Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D T4A Class I, Zone 2, IIC T4 Noxious gas test ISA-S71.04-1985 G3 Harsh Group A Environmental Product Compliance China RoHS Environmentally Friendly Use Period = 50 For details about hazardous substances go to tab “Downloads”, Category “Manufacturer's declaration”

Drawings

Schematic diagram Schematic diagram

U1 I10 1 U1 I10 1 RSSIU2 + I2 2 RSSIU2 + I2 2 ANT ANT

OFF ON OFF ON 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 SPORT 4 SPORT DIP-1 DIP-1

RAD-2400-IFS RAD-2400-IFS

PWR PWR

DAT 02 12 DAT 02 12

RAD-IDIO-MAP RAD-IDIO-MAP

ERR ERR

Reset Reset

RX TX RX TX

D(A)U3 D(B)I3 3 D(A)U3 D(B)I3 3 RXU4 I4TX GND4 RXU4 I4TX GND4 CO1 CO2 NC1 CO1 CO2 NC1

DIP switches Thumb wheel

09/15/2017 Page 4 / 10 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901538

I/O extension module - RAD-AO4-IFS - 2901538

Block diagram Functional drawing

IO-MAP U U 3.1 2 U U 3 4.1 0/4...20 mA I I 3.2 3.2 2 I I 3 4.2 GND 3.3 3.3 2 3 4.3

0...10V DC U U 2.1 2.1 1 U U 4 5.1 I1 I4 +24 V 0 V 2.2 I I 5.2 RSSI+ RSSI- PWR1 +I1 -I1 µC ANT PWR2 +I2 -I2 GND 2.3 2.3 1 4 5.3 OFF ON 1 2 3 SPORT 4

DIP-1 RAD-AI4-IFS

RAD-2400-IFS

PWR PWR

DAT 0 1 DAT 2 2

IO-MAP RAD-ID

ERR ERR

DC IFS

DC IFS Reset

RX TX

D(A) D(B) PWR3 +I3 -I3 RX TX GND PWR4 +I4 -I4 CO1 CO2 NC1

+24 V 0 V +24 V 0 V +24 V 0 V RSSI+ RSSI- PWR1 +I1 -I1 RSSI+ RSSI- PWR1 +I1 -I1 RSSI+ RSSI- PWR1 +I1 -I1 ANT PWR2 +I2 -I2 ANT PWR2 +I2 -I2 ANT PWR2 +I2 -I2

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 SPORT 4 SPORT 4 SPORT 4 DIP-1 DIP-1 DIP-1

RAD-AO4-IFS RAD-AO4-IFS RAD-AO4-IFS

RAD-2400-IFS RAD-2400-IFS RAD-2400-IFS

PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR

DAT 0 2 DAT 2 2 DAT 0 3 DAT 2 2 DAT 9 9 DAT 2 2

RAD-ID RAD-ID RAD-ID

IO-MAP IO-MAP IO-MAP

ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR

Reset Reset Reset

RX TX RX TX RX TX

D(A) D(B) PWR3 +I3 -I3 D(A) D(B) PWR3 +I3 -I3 D(A) D(B) PWR3 +I3 -I3 RX TX GND PWR4 +I4 -I4 RX TX GND PWR4 +I4 -I4 RX TX GND PWR4 +I4 -I4 CO1 CO2 NC1 CO1 CO2 NC1 CO1 CO2 NC1

Assignment of analog inputs and analog outputs

09/15/2017 Page 5 / 10 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901538

I/O extension module - RAD-AO4-IFS - 2901538

Dimensional drawing Schematic diagram

2

1 99 17,5 U 1 I 1 1 5 U 2 I 2

2 6

3 U 7 1 U I 2 1 I 2 1

2 12 OFF ON 1 2 3 4 4

DIP-1 11 RAD-AO4-IFS PWR

DAT 8 8 10 ERR

114,5 IO-MAP

U 3 U I 4 3 I 4 3

4 9 8

Function elements

09/15/2017 Page 6 / 10 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901538

I/O extension module - RAD-AO4-IFS - 2901538

Application drawing

Wireless module in I/O data mode

09/15/2017 Page 7 / 10 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901538

I/O extension module - RAD-AO4-IFS - 2901538

Application drawing

Wireless module in PLC/Modbus RTU mode

Articles in set

Electronic housing - ME 17,5 TBUS 1,5/ 5-ST-3,81 GN - 2709561

DIN rail connector for DIN rail mounting. Universal for TBUS housing. Gold-plated contacts, 5-pos.

Classifications eCl@ss

eCl@ss 4.0 27230207 eCl@ss 4.1 27230207 eCl@ss 5.0 27230207 eCl@ss 5.1 27242208 eCl@ss 6.0 27242208 eCl@ss 7.0 27242208 eCl@ss 8.0 27242601 eCl@ss 9.0 27242601

09/15/2017 Page 8 / 10 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901538

I/O extension module - RAD-AO4-IFS - 2901538

Classifications

ETIM

ETIM 3.0 EC001423 ETIM 4.0 EC000310 ETIM 5.0 EC001596 ETIM 6.0 EC001596 UNSPSC

UNSPSC 6.01 30211506 UNSPSC 7.0901 43223108 UNSPSC 11 39121008 UNSPSC 12.01 43223108 UNSPSC 13.2 32151602 Approvals

Approvals

Approvals

UL Listed / cUL Listed / EAC / cULus Listed

Ex Approvals

IECEx / UL Listed / cUL Listed / ATEX / cULus Listed

Approval details

UL Listed  http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/index.htm FILE E 238705

cUL Listed  http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/index.htm FILE E 238705

EAC  EAC-Zulassung

09/15/2017 Page 9 / 10 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901538

I/O extension module - RAD-AO4-IFS - 2901538

Approvals

cULus Listed 

Phoenix Contact 2017 © - all rights reserved http://www.phoenixcontact.com

09/15/2017 Page 10 / 10 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2867377

Antenna cable - RAD-CAB-RG213-40 - 2867377 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)

Antenna extension cable, length: 40 ft

Why buy this product

UV resistant

Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 STK Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 1,987.000 g Custom tariff number 85442000 Country of origin United States

Technical data

Dimensions Fixed cable length 12 m External diameter 10.00 mm Ambient conditions Ambient temperature (operation) -40 °C ... 80 °C Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 70 °C General Connection 1 Connector connection Connection method Type N (male) Note Both sides Cable type RG-213U Outer sheath, material PE

09/15/2017 Page 1 / 2 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2867377

Antenna cable - RAD-CAB-RG213-40 - 2867377

Technical data

General External sheath, color black Minimum bending radius 127.00 mm Frequency range 0.1 GHz ... 1 GHz Impedance 50 Ω Attenuation 868 / 900 MHz 2.88 dB

Classifications eCl@ss

eCl@ss 4.0 27060805 eCl@ss 4.1 27060805 eCl@ss 5.0 27061805 eCl@ss 5.1 27061805 eCl@ss 6.0 27061805 eCl@ss 7.0 27061805 eCl@ss 8.0 27060310 eCl@ss 9.0 27060310 ETIM

ETIM 2.0 EC000019 ETIM 3.0 EC000019 ETIM 4.0 EC000019 ETIM 5.0 EC001682 ETIM 6.0 EC001682 UNSPSC

UNSPSC 6.01 26121608 UNSPSC 7.0901 26121608 UNSPSC 11 26121608 UNSPSC 12.01 26121608 UNSPSC 13.2 26121606

Phoenix Contact 2017 © - all rights reserved http://www.phoenixcontact.com

09/15/2017 Page 2 / 2 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901535

I/O extension module - RAD-DI4-IFS - 2901535 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)

Radioline - I/O extension module, 4 digital inputs (0 ... 250 V AC/DC)

Why buy this product

Channel-to-channel electrical isolation Extended temperature range, -40 °C ... +70 °C Easy module replacement even during operation (hot swap) Digital wide-range inputs (0 ... 250 V AC/DC) Easy startup via thumbwheel Approved for use in zone 2

Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 STK

GTIN

GTIN 4046356610490 Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 200.000 g Custom tariff number 85177000 Country of origin Germany

Technical data

Note EMC: class A product, see manufacturer's declaration in the download Utilization restriction area Dimensions

09/15/2017 Page 1 / 8 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901535

I/O extension module - RAD-DI4-IFS - 2901535

Technical data

Dimensions Width 17.5 mm Height 99 mm Depth 114.5 mm Ambient conditions Degree of protection IP20 Ambient temperature (operation) -40 °C ... 70 °C -40 °F ... 158 °F Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 85 °C -40 °F ... 185 °F Permissible humidity (operation) 20 % ... 85 % Permissible humidity (storage/transport) 20 % ... 85 % Altitude 2000 m Vibration (operation) in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6: 5g, 10 Hz ... 150 Hz Shock 16g, 11 ms General Overvoltage category II Mounting position any Assembly instructions on standard DIN rail NS 35 in accordance with EN 60715 Degree of pollution 2 Housing material PA 6.6-FR Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0 1766 Years (Telcordia standard, 25°C temperature, 21% operating cycle (5 MTTF days a week, 8 hours a day)) 653 Years (Telcordia standard, 40°C temperature, 34.25% operating cycle (5 days a week, 12 hours a day)) 250 Years (Telcordia standard, temperature 40 °C, operating cycle 100 % (7 days a week, 24 hours a day)) Supply Supply voltage range 19.2 V DC ... 30.5 V DC (DIN rail connector) Max. current consumption ≤ 11 mA (At 24 V DC, at 25°C) Transient surge protection Yes Digital inputs Description of the input Digital input Number of inputs 4 Switching level "1" signal 10 V AC/DC ... 50 V AC/DC (Low-voltage input) 50 V AC/DC ... 250 V AC/DC (High-voltage input)

09/15/2017 Page 2 / 8 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901535

I/O extension module - RAD-DI4-IFS - 2901535

Technical data

Digital inputs Switching level "0" signal 0 V AC/DC ... 4 V AC/DC (Low-voltage input) 0 V AC/DC ... 20 V AC/DC (High-voltage input) Input frequency ≤ 2 Hz Min. voltage input signal 0 V AC/DC Max. voltage input signal 250 V AC/DC Electrical isolation 300 V (Rated insulation voltage (in each case between the digital Digital I/O inputs // TBUS supply, reinforced insulation according to EN 61010)) Test voltage Digital I/O 2.5 kV AC (50 Hz, 1 min.) Connection data Connection method Screw connection Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm² Conductor cross section solid max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.2 mm² Conductor cross section flexible max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section AWG min. 24 Conductor cross section AWG max. 14 Stripping length 7 mm Tightening torque 0.6 Nm Screw thread M3 Status indicator Status display Green LED (supply voltage, PWR) Green LED (bus communication, DAT) Red LED (periphery error, ERR) Yellow LED (digital input, DI1) Yellow LED (digital input, DI2) Yellow LED (digital input, DI3) Yellow LED (digital input, DI4) Standards and Regulations Electromagnetic compatibility Conformance with EMC Directive 2014/30/EU Standard designation EMC Directive 2014/30/EU Standards/regulations EN 61000-6-2 Standard designation EMC Directive 2014/30/EU Standards/regulations EN 61000-6-4

09/15/2017 Page 3 / 8 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901535

I/O extension module - RAD-DI4-IFS - 2901535

Technical data

Standards and Regulations Standard designation Ex Directive (ATEX) Standards/regulations EN 60079-0 Standard designation Ex Directive (ATEX) Standards/regulations EN-60079-15 Noise emission EN 61000-6-4 Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2 Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0 Shock 16g, 11 ms Vibration (operation) in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6: 5g, 10 Hz ... 150 Hz Conformance CE-compliant ATEX  II 3 G Ex nA IIC T4 Gc IECEx Ex nA IIC T4 Gc UL, USA/Canada UL 508 Listed Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D T4A Class I, Zone 2, IIC T4 Noxious gas test ISA-S71.04-1985 G3 Harsh Group A Environmental Product Compliance China RoHS Environmentally Friendly Use Period = 50 For details about hazardous substances go to tab “Downloads”, Category “Manufacturer's declaration”

Drawings

Schematic diagram Schematic diagram

+24DI1L V DI0 V1H DI1

RSSIDI2L + RSSIDI2H - DI2 +24DI1L V DI0 V1H DI1

ANT RSSIDI2L + RSSIDI2H - DI2 ANT

SPORT

SPORT

RAD-2400-IFS

RAD-2400-IFS

PWR PWR

DAT 08 18

RAD-IDIO-MAP DAT 08 18

RAD-ID ERR ERR

DI1 DI1

Reset

DI2 Reset DI2 DI3 DI3

DI3RX TX DI4RX TX

DI3L DI3H Di3 DI DI Di 4L 4H 4 DI3L DI3H DI3

DI4L DI4H DI4

Thumb wheel LED indicators

09/15/2017 Page 4 / 8 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901535

I/O extension module - RAD-DI4-IFS - 2901535

Block diagram Functional drawing

IO-MAP

10...50V AC/DC DI2L DI3L 2.1 2.1 5.1 DI2H DI3H +24 V 0 V DI1L DI1H DI1 2.2 5.2 RSSI+ RSSI- DI2L DI2H DI2 µC ANT GND DI2 DI3 2.3 2.3 5.3

SPORT DI1L DI4L 1.1 6.1 RAD-DI4-IFS

RAD-2400-IFS 50...250V AC/DC DI1H DI4H 1.2 1.2 6.2 PWR PWR DI1 DI4 GND DAT 0 1 DAT 8 8

IO-MAP 1.3 1.3 6.3 RAD-ID

ERR ERR

DC IFS DI1

DC IFS Reset DI2

DO1

RX TX DO2

D(A) D(B) RX TX GND DI3L DI3H DI3 CO1 CO2 NC1 DI4L DI4H DI4

+24 V 0 V COM1 NO1 NC1 +24 V 0 V COM1 NO1 NC1 +24 V 0 V COM1 NO1 NC1 RSSI+ RSSI- COM2 NO2 NC2 RSSI+ RSSI- COM2 NO2 NC2 RSSI+ RSSI- COM2 NO2 NC2 ANT ANT ANT

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 SPORT 4 SPORT 4 SPORT 4 DIP-1 DIP-1 DIP-1

RAD-2400-IFS RAD-2400-IFS RAD-2400-IFS

RAD-DOR4-IFS RAD-DOR4-IFS RAD-DOR4-IFS

PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR

DAT 0 2 DAT 8 8 DAT 0 3 DAT 8 8 DAT 9 9 DAT 8 8

IO-MAP IO-MAP IO-MAP

RAD-ID RAD-ID RAD-ID

ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR

DI1 DI1 DI1

Reset Reset Reset

DI2 DI2 DI2

DO1 DO1 DO1

RX TX DO2 RX TX DO2 RX TX DO2

D(A) D(B) D(A) D(B) D(A) D(B)

RX TX GND COM3 NO3 NC3 RX TX GND COM3 NO3 NC3 RX TX GND COM3 NO3 NC3 CO1 CO2 NC1 COM4 NO4 NC4 CO1 CO2 NC1 COM4 NO4 NC4 CO1 CO2 NC1 COM4 NO4 NC4

Assignment of digital inputs and digital outputs

09/15/2017 Page 5 / 8 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901535

I/O extension module - RAD-DI4-IFS - 2901535

Dimensional drawing Schematic diagram

2

1 99 17,5 DI 1L DI 1H DI 1

DI 2L DI 2H DI 2 4

5

DI DI1L DI 6 2L 1H DI DI 2H DI1 2 12 3

RAD-DI4-IFS 11 PWR

114,5 DAT 8 8 ERR 10 IO-MAP

DI1 9 DI2 DI3

DI4

DI DI3L DI 4L 3H DI DI 4H DI3 4 8 7

Function elements

09/15/2017 Page 6 / 8 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901535

I/O extension module - RAD-DI4-IFS - 2901535

Application drawing

Wireless module in I/O data mode

09/15/2017 Page 7 / 8 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901535

I/O extension module - RAD-DI4-IFS - 2901535

Application drawing

Wireless module in PLC/Modbus RTU mode

Articles in set

Electronic housing - ME 17,5 TBUS 1,5/ 5-ST-3,81 GN - 2709561

DIN rail connector for DIN rail mounting. Universal for TBUS housing. Gold-plated contacts, 5-pos.

Phoenix Contact 2017 © - all rights reserved http://www.phoenixcontact.com

09/15/2017 Page 8 / 8 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901536

I/O extension module - RAD-DOR4-IFS - 2901536 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)

Radioline - I/O extension module, 4 digital relay outputs (5 A, 250 V AC/24 V DC)

Why buy this product

Channel-to-channel electrical isolation Extended temperature range, -40 °C ... +70 °C Easy module replacement even during operation (hot swap) Digital wide range outputs (0 ... 250 V AC/DC) Easy startup via thumbwheel Approved for use in zone 2

Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 STK

GTIN

GTIN 4046356610483 Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 215.200 g Custom tariff number 85177000 Country of origin Germany

Technical data

Note EMC: class A product, see manufacturer's declaration in the download Utilization restriction area Dimensions

09/15/2017 Page 1 / 9 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901536

I/O extension module - RAD-DOR4-IFS - 2901536

Technical data

Dimensions Width 17.5 mm Height 99 mm Depth 114.5 mm Ambient conditions Degree of protection IP20 Ambient temperature (operation) -40 °C ... 70 °C (>55°C derating) -40 °F ... 158 °F (>131°F derating) Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 85 °C -40 °F ... 185 °F Permissible humidity (operation) 20 % ... 85 % Permissible humidity (storage/transport) 20 % ... 85 % Altitude 2000 m Vibration (operation) in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6: 5g, 10 Hz ... 150 Hz Shock 16g, 11 ms General Overvoltage category II Mounting position any Assembly instructions on standard DIN rail NS 35 in accordance with EN 60715 Degree of pollution 2 Housing material PA 6.6-FR Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0 1087 Years (Telcordia standard, 25°C temperature, 21% operating cycle (5 MTTF days a week, 8 hours a day)) 523 Years (Telcordia standard, 40°C temperature, 34.25% operating cycle (5 days a week, 12 hours a day)) 204 Years (Telcordia standard, temperature 40 °C, operating cycle 100 % (7 days a week, 24 hours a day)) Supply Supply voltage range 19.2 V DC ... 30.5 V DC (DIN rail connector) Max. current consumption ≤ 55 mA (At 24 V DC, at 25°C) Transient surge protection Yes Digital outputs Number of outputs 4 Contact type PDT

Contact material AgSnO2 Maximum switching voltage 250 V AC/DC

09/15/2017 Page 2 / 9 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901536

I/O extension module - RAD-DOR4-IFS - 2901536

Technical data

Digital outputs Min. switching current ≥ 10 mA Max. switching current 5 A (per channel)

Mechanical service life 1 x 107 cycles

Electrical service life 1 x 105 cycles (At 5 A, 250 V AC, ohmic)

2 x 105 cycles (At 2 A, 250 V AC, cosφ 0.4)

2 x 105 cycles (At 1 A, 24 V DC, L/R = 48 ms) Maximum switching frequency 2 Hz Switching capacity 120 W (24 V DC) 120 W (30 V DC) 20 W (48 V DC) 18 W (60 V DC) 22 W (110 V DC) 40 W (220 V DC) 42 W (250 V DC) 1250 VA Behavior of the outputs (adjustable via DIP switch) Hold / Reset Electrical isolation 300 V (Rated insulation voltage (in each case between the digital Digital I/O outputs // TBUS supply, reinforced insulation according to EN 61010)) Test voltage Digital I/O 2.5 kV AC (50 Hz, 1 min.) Connection data Connection method Screw connection Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm² Conductor cross section solid max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.2 mm² Conductor cross section flexible max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section AWG min. 24 Conductor cross section AWG max. 14 Stripping length 7 mm Tightening torque 0.6 Nm Screw thread M3 Status indicator Status display Green LED (supply voltage, PWR) Green LED (bus communication, DAT)

09/15/2017 Page 3 / 9 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901536

I/O extension module - RAD-DOR4-IFS - 2901536

Technical data

Status indicator Red LED (periphery error, ERR) Yellow LED (digital output, DO1) Yellow LED (digital output, DO2) Yellow LED (digital output, DO3) Yellow LED (digital output, DO4) Standards and Regulations Electromagnetic compatibility Conformance with EMC Directive 2014/30/EU Standard designation EMC Directive 2014/30/EU Standards/regulations EN 61000-6-2 Standard designation EMC Directive 2014/30/EU Standards/regulations EN 61000-6-4 Standard designation Ex Directive (ATEX) Standards/regulations EN 60079-0 Standard designation Ex Directive (ATEX) Standards/regulations EN-60079-15 Noise emission EN 61000-6-4 Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2 Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0 Shock 16g, 11 ms Vibration (operation) in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6: 5g, 10 Hz ... 150 Hz Conformance CE-compliant ATEX  II 3 G Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc IECEx Ex nA nC IIC T4 Gc UL, USA/Canada UL 508 Listed Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D T4A Class I, Zone 2, IIC T4 Noxious gas test ISA-S71.04-1985 G3 Harsh Group A Environmental Product Compliance China RoHS Environmentally Friendly Use Period = 50 For details about hazardous substances go to tab “Downloads”, Category “Manufacturer's declaration”

Drawings

09/15/2017 Page 4 / 9 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901536

I/O extension module - RAD-DOR4-IFS - 2901536

Schematic diagram Schematic diagram

+24COM V1 NO0 V1 NC1 +24COM V1 NO0 V1 NC1

RSSICOM+2 RSSINO2 - NC2 RSSICOM+2 RSSINO2 - NC2 ANT ANT

OFF ON OFF ON 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 SPORT 4 SPORT DIP-1 DIP-1

RAD-2400-IFS RAD-2400-IFS

PWR PWR

DAT 08 18 DAT 08 18

RAD-IDIO-MAP RAD-IDIO-MAP

ERR ERR

DO1 DO1

Reset Reset

DO2 DO2

DO3 DO3

DO4RX TX DO4RX TX

D(A) D(B) D(A) D(B)

COMRX 3 NOTX3 GNDNC3 COMRX 3 NOTX3 GNDNC3

COMCO1 4 CONO42 NC41 COMCO1 4 CONO42 NC41

DIP switches Thumb wheel

Schematic diagram Block diagram

IO-MAP +24COM V1 NO0 V1 NC1

RSSICOM+2 RSSINO2 - NC2 ANT

OFF ON 1 2 3 4 SPORT DIP-1

RAD-2400-IFS

PWR

DAT 08 18 RAD-IDIO-MAP COM2 COM3 ERR 2.1 5.1 NO NO 2.2 2 3 5.2 DO1 µC Reset NC NC DO2 2.3 2 3 5.3 DO3

DO4RX TX D(A) D(B) COM COM COMRX 3 NOTX3 GNDNC3 1 4 COM1 NO NC CO 4 CO42 NC41 1.1 1.1 6.1 24 V DC/250 V AC NO NO 1.2 1.2 1 4 6.2 NC NC 1.3 1 4 6.3

DC IFS LED indicators DC IFS

09/15/2017 Page 5 / 9 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901536

I/O extension module - RAD-DOR4-IFS - 2901536

Functional drawing Dimensional drawing

99 17,5

+24 V 0 V DI1L DI1H DI1 RSSI+ RSSI- DI2L DI2H DI2 ANT

SPORT

RAD-DI4-IFS

RAD-2400-IFS

PWR PWR

DAT 0 1 DAT 8 8

IO-MAP

RAD-ID

ERR ERR

114,5

DI1

Reset

DI2

DO1

RX TX DO2

D(A) D(B) RX TX GND DI3L DI3H DI3 CO1 CO2 NC1 DI4L DI4H DI4

+24 V 0 V COM1 NO1 NC1 +24 V 0 V COM1 NO1 NC1 +24 V 0 V COM1 NO1 NC1 RSSI+ RSSI- COM2 NO2 NC2 RSSI+ RSSI- COM2 NO2 NC2 RSSI+ RSSI- COM2 NO2 NC2 ANT ANT ANT

OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON 1 1 1 2 2 2 3 3 3 SPORT 4 SPORT 4 SPORT 4 DIP-1 DIP-1 DIP-1

RAD-2400-IFS RAD-2400-IFS RAD-2400-IFS

RAD-DOR4-IFS RAD-DOR4-IFS RAD-DOR4-IFS

PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR PWR

DAT 0 2 DAT 8 8 DAT 0 3 DAT 8 8 DAT 9 9 DAT 8 8

IO-MAP IO-MAP IO-MAP

RAD-ID RAD-ID RAD-ID

ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR ERR

DI1 DI1 DI1

Reset Reset Reset

DI2 DI2 DI2

DO1 DO1 DO1

RX TX DO2 RX TX DO2 RX TX DO2

D(A) D(B) D(A) D(B) D(A) D(B)

RX TX GND COM3 NO3 NC3 RX TX GND COM3 NO3 NC3 RX TX GND COM3 NO3 NC3 CO1 CO2 NC1 COM4 NO4 NC4 CO1 CO2 NC1 COM4 NO4 NC4 CO1 CO2 NC1 COM4 NO4 NC4

Assignment of digital inputs and digital outputs

09/15/2017 Page 6 / 9 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901536

I/O extension module - RAD-DOR4-IFS - 2901536

Schematic diagram

2 1

COM

1 NO 1 NC 1

COM

2 NO 2 NC 2 5

6

COM 3 COM 1 NO 7 2 NO1 NC 2 NC1 2

OFF ON 1 2 13 3 4 4

DIP-1 12 PWR RAD-DOR4-IFS DAT 8 8 ERR 11 IO-MAP

DO1 10 DO2 DO3

DO4

COM COM3 NO 4 NO3 NC 4 NC3 9 4 8

Function elements

09/15/2017 Page 7 / 9 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901536

I/O extension module - RAD-DOR4-IFS - 2901536

Application drawing

Wireless module in I/O data mode

09/15/2017 Page 8 / 9 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901536

I/O extension module - RAD-DOR4-IFS - 2901536

Application drawing

Wireless module in PLC/Modbus RTU mode

Articles in set

Electronic housing - ME 17,5 TBUS 1,5/ 5-ST-3,81 GN - 2709561

DIN rail connector for DIN rail mounting. Universal for TBUS housing. Gold-plated contacts, 5-pos.

Phoenix Contact 2017 © - all rights reserved http://www.phoenixcontact.com

09/15/2017 Page 9 / 9 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2803166

Surge protection device - CN-UB-70DC-6-BB - 2803166 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)

Attachment plug with surge protection for coaxial signal interfaces. Connection: N connector, female/female

Why buy this product

Mounting plate enables mounting, e.g., in a control cabinet

Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 STK Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 50.000 g Custom tariff number 85363010 Country of origin United States

Technical data

Dimensions Height 24 mm Width 24 mm Depth 47 mm Ambient conditions Ambient temperature (operation) -40 °C ... 90 °C Degree of protection IP68 General Housing material Brass (CuZn) Color nickel Standards for cearances and creepage distances DIN VDE 0110-1 IEC 60664-1

09/15/2017 Page 1 / 5 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2803166

Surge protection device - CN-UB-70DC-6-BB - 2803166

Technical data

General Mounting type Connection-specific intermediate plugging Type Attachment plug Direction of action Line-Shield/Earth Ground Additional descriptions To meet the discharge conditions for DC voltages, please note the following information: "The surge protective device should be used Note together with a transmitter unit, which shuts down in the event of a short- circuit." Protective circuit IEC test classification C2 C3 D1 VDE requirement class C2 C3 D1

Maximum continuous voltage UC 70 V DC 50 V AC

Maximum continuous voltage UC (wire-ground) 70 V DC 50 V AC Rated current 10 A

Operating effective current IC at UC ≤ 1 µA

Nominal discharge current In (8/20) µs 5 kA

Nominal discharge current In (8/20) µs (core-earth) 5 kA

Nominal discharge current In (8/20) µs (Core-Shield) 5 kA

Total discharge current Itotal (8/20) µs 5 kA

Max. discharge current Imax (8/20) µs maximum (Core-Earth) 10 kA

Max. discharge current Imax (8/20) µs maximum (Core-Shield) 10 kA Nominal pulse current Ian (10/1000) µs (Core-Shield) 100 A

Impulse discharge current (10/350) µs, peak value limp 1 kA Output voltage limitation at 1 kV/µs (core-earth) spike ≤ 650 V Output voltage limitation at 1 kV/µs (Core-Shield) spike ≤ 650 V Output voltage limitation at 1 kV/µs (core-earth) static ≤ 650 V Output voltage limitation at 1 kV/µs (Core-Shield) static ≤ 650 V

Voltage protection level Up (core-ground) ≤ 800 V (C2 - 4 kV / 2 kA) ≤ 1 kV (C2 - 10 kV / 5 kA)

Voltage protection level Up (core-shield) ≤ 800 V (C2 - 4 kV / 2 kA) ≤ 1 kV (C2 - 10 kV / 5 kA) 09/15/2017 Page 2 / 5 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2803166

Surge protection device - CN-UB-70DC-6-BB - 2803166

Technical data

Protective circuit Response time tA (core-earth) ≤ 100 ns Response time tA (core-GND) ≤ 100 ns Input attenuation aE, asym. 0.1 dB (≤ 6 GHz) Cut-off frequency fg (3 dB), asym. (shield) in 50 Ohm system > 6 GHz Frequency range 0 Hz ... 6 GHz Standing wave ratio SWR in a 50 Ω system typ. 1.15 (≤ 6 GHz)

Permissible HF power Pmax at VSWR = xx (50 ohm system) 30 W (VSWR = 1.15) Capacity (core-earth) typ. 1.5 pF Capacity asymmetrical (shield) typ. 1.5 pF Surge protection fault message none Impulse durability (conductor-ground) C2 - 10 kV/5 kA C3 - 100 A D1 - 1 kA Impulse durability (conductor-shield) C2 - 10 kV/5 kA C3 - 100 A D1 - 1 kA Alternating current carrying capacity (conductor-shield) 5 A - 1 s Connection data Connection method N connector 50 Ω Connection method IN N connector, female Connection method OUT N connector, female Standards and Regulations Standards/regulations IEC 61643-21 Standards/specifications IEC 61643-21 2000

Drawings

Circuit diagram Dimensional drawing

47 23 24

16

6

09/15/2017 Page 3 / 5 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2803166

Surge protection device - CN-UB-70DC-6-BB - 2803166

Classifications eCl@ss

eCl@ss 4.0 27140201 eCl@ss 4.1 27130801 eCl@ss 5.0 27130801 eCl@ss 5.1 27130801 eCl@ss 6.0 27130807 eCl@ss 7.0 27130807 eCl@ss 8.0 27130807 eCl@ss 9.0 27130807 ETIM

ETIM 2.0 EC000943 ETIM 3.0 EC000943 ETIM 4.0 EC000943 ETIM 5.0 EC000943 ETIM 6.0 EC000943 UNSPSC

UNSPSC 6.01 30212010 UNSPSC 7.0901 39121610 UNSPSC 11 39121610 UNSPSC 12.01 39121610 UNSPSC 13.2 39121620 Approvals

Approvals

Approvals

EAC / EAC

Ex Approvals

Approval details

RU C- EAC  DE.A*30.B01561 09/15/2017 Page 4 / 5 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2803166

Surge protection device - CN-UB-70DC-6-BB - 2803166

Approvals

EAC  EAC-Zulassung Accessories

Accessories Assembly adapter

Mounting plate - CN-UB/MP - 2818135

Tongue for attaching the CN-UB..., to housing panels, for example.

Mounting plate - CN-UB/MP-90DEG-50 - 2803137

Angled bracket for individually fixing CN-UB... to housing panels, for example.

Additional products

Mounting plate - CN-UB/MP - 2818135

Tongue for attaching the CN-UB..., to housing panels, for example.

Phoenix Contact 2017 © - all rights reserved http://www.phoenixcontact.com

09/15/2017 Page 5 / 5 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2903263

Antenna cable - RAD-PIG-RSMA/N-0.5 - 2903263 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)

Antenna cable, 0.5 m in length; N (male) -> RSMA (male), impedance 50 ohms

The figure shows a version of the product

Product Description Coaxial antenna adapter cable, N (male) to RSMA (male), 50 Ω, 0.5 m Why buy this product

Low attenuation UV resistant

Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 STK Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 50.000 g Custom tariff number 85442000 Country of origin United States

Technical data

Dimensions Fixed cable length 0.5 m External diameter 4.95 mm Ambient conditions Ambient temperature (operation) -40 °C ... 85 °C General Connection method RSMA (male) N (male)

09/15/2017 Page 1 / 3 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2903263

Antenna cable - RAD-PIG-RSMA/N-0.5 - 2903263

Technical data

General Cable type 195 Outer sheath, material PE External sheath, color black Minimum bending radius 12.70 mm Frequency range 0.3 GHz ... 6 GHz Impedance 50 Ω Attenuation 868 / 900 MHz 0.4 dB 2.4 GHz 0.5 dB 5 GHz 0.7 dB

Classifications eCl@ss

eCl@ss 4.0 27230207 eCl@ss 4.1 27250312 eCl@ss 5.0 27242208 eCl@ss 5.1 27061802 eCl@ss 6.0 27242208 eCl@ss 7.0 27242208 eCl@ss 8.0 27060310 eCl@ss 9.0 27060310 ETIM

ETIM 3.0 EC001423 ETIM 4.0 EC000019 ETIM 5.0 EC001682 ETIM 6.0 EC001682 UNSPSC

UNSPSC 6.01 30211506 UNSPSC 7.0901 43223108 UNSPSC 11 39121008 UNSPSC 12.01 43223108 UNSPSC 13.2 26121606

09/15/2017 Page 2 / 3 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2903263

Antenna cable - RAD-PIG-RSMA/N-0.5 - 2903263

Approvals

Approvals

Approvals

EAC / EAC

Ex Approvals

Approval details

EAC  EAC-Zulassung

RU C- EAC  DE.A*30.B00767

Phoenix Contact 2017 © - all rights reserved http://www.phoenixcontact.com

09/15/2017 Page 3 / 3 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)

Radioline - 900 MHz wireless transceiver with RS-232/485 interface, can be extended with I/O modules, RSMA (female) antenna connection, point-to-point, star, and mesh networks up to 250 stations, range of up to 32 km (line of sight), use in North America

Product Description Radioline is the new wireless system for large systems. Special features include extremely easy assignment of inputs and outputs by simply turning the thumbwheel - without any programming. Radioline transmits I/O signals (I/O mode) or serial data (serial mode) and is therefore very versatile. Alternatively, I/O signals can now also be connected to controllers directly using the Modbus protocol (PLC/Modbus RTU mode). In addition, you can implement various network structures: from a simple point-to-point connection to complex mesh networks. Thanks to the latest Trusted Wireless technology, Radioline is the ideal choice for industrial use. Why buy this product

Extended temperature range, -40 °C ... +70 °C Range of several kilometers thanks to adjustable data rates for the wireless interface (16 ... 500 kbps) Integrated RS-232/RS-485 interface Quick and easy startup without programming High degree of reliability due to Trusted Wireless 2.0 technology (AES encryption, frequency hopping method, and coexistence management) Mesh networks of up to 250 devices

Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 STK

GTIN

GTIN 4046356610209 Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 350.000 g Custom tariff number 85176200 Country of origin United States

09/15/2017 Page 1 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Technical data

Note The products are offered exclusively for export outside the EU and the Trade restriction European Economic Area. Dimensions Width 35 mm Height 99 mm Depth 114.5 mm Ambient conditions Degree of protection IP20 Ambient temperature (operation) -40 °C ... 70 °C -40 °F ... 158 °F Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 85 °C -40 °F ... 185 °F Permissible humidity (operation) 20 % ... 85 % Permissible humidity (storage/transport) 20 % ... 85 % Altitude 2000 m Vibration (operation) in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6: 5g, 10 Hz ... 150 Hz Shock 16g, 11 ms General Overvoltage category II Assembly instructions on standard DIN rail NS 35 in accordance with EN 60715 Degree of pollution 2 Housing material PA 6.6-FR Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0 The products are offered exclusively for export outside the European Export note Economic Area (EEA). Supply Supply voltage range 10.8 V DC ... 30.5 V DC Max. current consumption 328 mA (@24 V DC) Nominal power consumption 1.7 W (30 dBm) Power consumption 8.4 W (peak; 30 dBm) Transient surge protection Yes Wireless interface Antenna connection RSMA (female) Direction Bi-directional Frequency 900 MHz

09/15/2017 Page 2 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Technical data

Wireless interface Frequency range 902 MHz ... 928 MHz Data rate 16 kbps (adjustable) 125 kbps (adjustable) 250 kbps (adjustable) 500 kbps (adjustable) Receiver sensitivity -112 dBm (16 kbps) -105 dBm (125 kbps) -102 dBm (250 kbps) -95 dBm (500 kbps) Transmission power max. 1 W (adjustable) ± 32 km (The range may be considerably above or below that stated, and Range depends on the environment, antenna technology, and the product used) Security 128-bit data encryption Serial interface Interface 1 RS-232 Connection method COMBICON plug-in screw terminal block D-SUB-9 female connector Connection technology 3-conductor Transmission speed 0.3 ... 115.2 kbps Interface 2 RS-485 Connection method COMBICON plug-in screw terminal block Connection technology 2-wire Termination resistor 390 Ω (switchable via DIP switches) 150 Ω (switchable via DIP switches) 390 Ω (switchable via DIP switches) Transmission speed 0.3 ... 115.2 kbps RSSI output Number of outputs 1 Voltage output signal 0 V ... 3 V RF link relay output Number of outputs 1 Contact type PDT Contact material PdRu, gold-plated Maximum switching voltage 30 V AC/DC Max. switching current 500 mA

Electrical service life 5 x 105 switching cycles with 0.5 A at 30 V DC

09/15/2017 Page 3 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Technical data

Connection data Connection method Screw connection Conductor cross section solid min. 0.2 mm² Conductor cross section solid max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section flexible min. 0.2 mm² Conductor cross section flexible max. 2.5 mm² Conductor cross section AWG min. 24 Conductor cross section AWG max. 14 Stripping length 7 mm Tightening torque 0.6 Nm Screw thread M3 Status indicator Status display Green LED (supply voltage, PWR) Green LED (bus communication, DAT) Red LED (periphery error, ERR) 3x green, 1x yellow LED (LED bar graph receive quality, RSSI) Green LED (receive data, RX) Green LED (transmit data, TX) Standards and Regulations Electromagnetic compatibility Conformance with EMC Directive 2004/108/EC Flammability rating according to UL 94 V0 Interface description Trusted Wireless Security 128-bit data encryption Shock 16g, 11 ms Vibration (operation) in accordance with IEC 60068-2-6: 5g, 10 Hz ... 150 Hz Conformance FCC Directive, Part 15.247 ISC Directive RSS 210 UL, USA Class I, Zone 2, AEx nA nC IIC T4 UL, USA/Canada Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C, D UL, Canada Class I, Zone 2, Ex nA nC nL IIC T4 Gc X CSA CSA C22.2 Environmental Product Compliance China RoHS Environmentally Friendly Use Period = 50 For details about hazardous substances go to tab “Downloads”, Category “Manufacturer's declaration”

Drawings

09/15/2017 Page 4 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Block diagram Dimensional drawing

35 99

RAD-ID D(A) 4.1 RS-485

S-Port D(B) RF 4.2

RSSI+ RX 2.1 U 5.1 RSSI- RS-232 TX 2.2 µC 5.2 GND 5.3

+24 V COM 114,5 1.1 DC 1 6.1 0 V NO1 1.2 DC 6.2 NC 1 6.3

IFS IFS

Classifications eCl@ss

eCl@ss 4.0 27230207 eCl@ss 4.1 27230207 eCl@ss 5.0 27230207 eCl@ss 5.1 27242208 eCl@ss 6.0 27242208 eCl@ss 7.0 27242208 eCl@ss 8.0 19179290 eCl@ss 9.0 19179290 ETIM

ETIM 3.0 EC001423 ETIM 4.0 EC000310 ETIM 5.0 EC000310 ETIM 6.0 EC000310 UNSPSC

UNSPSC 6.01 30211506 UNSPSC 7.0901 43223108 UNSPSC 11 39121008 UNSPSC 12.01 43223108 UNSPSC 13.2 43222604 Approvals

Approvals

09/15/2017 Page 5 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Approvals

Approvals

UL Listed / cUL Listed / cULus Listed

Ex Approvals

UL Listed / cUL Listed / cULus Listed

Approval details

UL Listed  http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/index.htm FILE E 238705

cUL Listed  http://database.ul.com/cgi-bin/XYV/template/LISEXT/1FRAME/index.htm FILE E 238705

cULus Listed  Accessories

Accessories Antenna

Antenna - RAD-ISM-900-ANT-OMNI-FG-3-N - 2867791

Omnidirectional antenna, 900 MHz, gain: 5 dBi, polarization: linear, opening angle: h/v 360°/28°, degree of protection: IP65, connection: N (female), incl. mounting bracket and mast clips

Antenna - RAD-ISM-900-ANT-OMNI-5 - 2867199

Omnidirectional antenna, 900 MHz, gain: 7 dBi, polarization: linear, opening angle: h/v 360°/30°, degree of protection: IP65, connection: N (female), incl. mounting bracket and mast clips

09/15/2017 Page 6 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Accessories

Antenna - RAD-ISM-900-ANT-YAGI-3-N - 2867801

Directional antenna, 868 MHz / 900 MHz, gain: 5 dBi, polarization: linear, opening angle: h/v 168°/78°, degree of protection: IP65, connection: N (female), incl. mounting bracket and mast clips

Antenna - RAD-ISM-900-ANT-OMNI-FG-6-N - 2885579

Omnidirectional antenna, 900 MHz, gain: 8 dBi, polarization: linear, opening angle: h/v 360°/15°, degree of protection: IP65, connection: N (female), incl. mounting bracket and mast clips

Antenna - RAD-ISM-900-ANT-YAGI-6.5-N - 2867814

Directional antenna, 868 MHz / 900 MHz, gain: 8.5 dBi, polarization: linear, opening angle: h/v 100°/62°, degree of protection: IP65, connection: N (female), incl. mounting bracket and mast clips

Antenna - RAD-ISM-900-ANT-YAGI-10-N - 5606614

Directional antenna 868 MHz / 900 MHz, gain: 12 dBi, polarization: linear, opening angle: h/v 56°/46°, degree of protection: IP65, connection: N (female), incl. mounting bracket and mast clips

Antenna - RAD-900-ANT-OMNI-2-2-RSMA - 2904801

Omnidirectional antenna, 900 MHz, gain: 2 dBi, polarization: linear, degree of protection: IP65, connection: RSMA (male), incl. 1.8 m / 6 ft. connecting cable and mounting bracket for wall mounting

09/15/2017 Page 7 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Accessories

Antenna - RAD-900-ANT-OMNI-2-N - 2904802

Omnidirectional antenna, 868 MHz / 900 MHz, gain: 2 dBi, polarization: linear, opening angle: h/v 360°/50°, degree of protection: IP66, connection: N (female), for control cabinet mounting (optional wall mounting)

Coaxial adapter

Adapter - RAD-ADP-N/F-N/F - 2867843

Antenna adapter for control cabinet feed-through, frequency range: 0.3 GHz ... 6 GHz, degree of protection: IP65, connection: 2 x N (female)

Adapter - RAD-ADP-RSMA/M-RSMA/F-90 - 2904790

Antenna adapter, frequency range: 0.3 GHz ... 6 GHz, connection: RSMA (male) -> RSMA (female), 90° angled

Coaxial cable

Antenna cable - RAD-PIG-RSMA/N-0.5 - 2903263

Antenna cable, 0.5 m in length; N (male) -> RSMA (male), impedance 50 ohms

Antenna cable - RAD-PIG-RSMA/N-1 - 2903264

Antenna cable, 1 m in length; N (male) -> RSMA (male), impedance 50 ohms

09/15/2017 Page 8 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Accessories

Antenna cable - RAD-PIG-RSMA/N-2 - 2903265

Antenna cable, 2 m in length; N (male) -> RSMA (male), impedance 50 ohms

Antenna cable - RAD-PIG-RSMA/N-3 - 2903266

Antenna cable, 3 m in length; N (male) -> RSMA (male), impedance 50 ohms

Antenna cable - RAD-CAB-PFP240-10 - 5606124

Antenna cable, 10 ft. in length, type N (male) to type N (male), 50 Ω impedance

Antenna cable - RAD-CAB-PFP400-20 - 5606125

Antenna cable, 20 ft. in length, type N (male) to type N (male), 50 Ω impedance

Antenna cable - RAD-CAB-PFP500-25 - 5606126

Antenna cable, 25 ft. in length, type N (male) to type N (male), 50 Ω impedance

09/15/2017 Page 9 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Accessories

Antenna cable - RAD-CAB-RG213-40 - 2867377

Antenna extension cable, length: 40 ft

Antenna cable - RAD-CAB-RG213-50 - 2867225

Antenna extension cable, length: 50 ft

Antenna cable - RAD-CAB-PFP400-60 - 2867380

Antenna extension cable, length: 60 ft

Antenna cable - RAD-CAB-PFP400-80 - 2867393

Antenna extension cable, length: 80 ft

Antenna cable - RAD-CAB-PFP400-100 - 2867238

Antenna extension cable, length: 100 ft

09/15/2017 Page 10 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Accessories

Antenna cable - RAD-CAB-PFP600-150 - 2885184

Antenna extension cable, length: 150 ft

Antenna cable - RAD-CAB-PFP900-200 - 2885197

Antenna extension cable, length: 200 ft

Communication module

Communication module - RAD-RS485-IFS - 2702184

Radioline - RS-485 multipoint multiplexer, can be extended with I/O modules, can be used as Modbus/RTU bus coupler or can be combined with Radioline wireless system, up to 99 stations, range of up to 1.2 km on in-house copper cables

Configuration memory

Configuration memory - RAD-MEMORY - 2902828

Radioline - memory stick for saving custom configuration data

Configuration memory - RAD-900-CONF-RF1 - 2702122

Radioline - configuration stick for easy and safe network addressing for the 900 MHz wireless module (RAD-900-...), unique network ID, RF band 1

09/15/2017 Page 11 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Accessories

Control box

Control cabinet - RAD-SYS-NEMA4X-900 - 2917188

NEMA 4X enclosure for wireless systems

DIN rail connector

Electronic housing - ME 17,5 TBUS 1,5/ 5-ST-3,81 GN - 2709561

DIN rail connector for DIN rail mounting. Universal for TBUS housing. Gold-plated contacts, 5-pos.

Extension module

I/O extension module - RAD-DAIO6-IFS - 2901533

Radioline - I/O extension module, 2 digital inputs and outputs (0 ... 250 V AC/DC) and 1 analog input (0/4 ... 20 mA) and output (0/4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 10 V)

I/O extension module - RAD-DI4-IFS - 2901535

Radioline - I/O extension module, 4 digital inputs (0 ... 250 V AC/DC)

09/15/2017 Page 12 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Accessories

I/O extension module - RAD-DOR4-IFS - 2901536

Radioline - I/O extension module, 4 digital relay outputs (5 A, 250 V AC/24 V DC)

I/O extension module - RAD-DI8-IFS - 2901539

Radioline - I/O extension module, 8 digital inputs (0 ... 30.5 V DC) or 2 pulse inputs up to 100 Hz

I/O extension module - RAD-DO8-IFS - 2902811

Radioline - I/O extension module, 8 digital transistor outputs (30.5 V DC/200 mA)

I/O extension module - RAD-AI4-IFS - 2901537

Radioline - I/O extension module, 4 analog current inputs (0/4 mA ... 20 mA)

I/O extension module - RAD-AO4-IFS - 2901538

Radioline - I/O extension module, 4 analog current or voltage outputs (0/4 mA ... 20 mA, 0 V ... 10 V)

Mounting material

09/15/2017 Page 13 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Accessories

Weather protection tape - RAD-TAPE-SV-19-3 - 2903182

Vulcanizing sealing tape for external protection of adapters, cable connections, etc. against the effects of weather, roll length: 3 m

Power supply

Power supply unit - MINI-SYS-PS-100-240AC/24DC/1.5 - 2866983

Primary-switched MINI POWER supply for DIN rail mounting, input: 1-phase, output: 24 V DC/1.5 A

Programming cable

Cable for programming - RAD-CABLE-USB - 2903447

Radioline - USB data cable for communication between the PC and Radioline devices, energy supply for diagnostics and configuration via the USB port of the PC, cable length: 2 m / 6.5 ft

Surge protection for transceiver systems

Surge protection device - CN-UB-70DC-6-BB - 2803166

Attachment plug with surge protection for coaxial signal interfaces. Connection: N connector, female/female

09/15/2017 Page 14 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Accessories

Surge protection device - CN-LAMBDA/4-2.2-BB - 2800024

Attachment plug with Lambda/4 technology as surge protection for coaxial signal interfaces. Connection: N connectors socket-socket

Additional products

I/O extension module - RAD-DAIO6-IFS - 2901533

Radioline - I/O extension module, 2 digital inputs and outputs (0 ... 250 V AC/DC) and 1 analog input (0/4 ... 20 mA) and output (0/4 ... 20 mA, 0 ... 10 V)

I/O extension module - RAD-DI4-IFS - 2901535

Radioline - I/O extension module, 4 digital inputs (0 ... 250 V AC/DC)

I/O extension module - RAD-DOR4-IFS - 2901536

Radioline - I/O extension module, 4 digital relay outputs (5 A, 250 V AC/24 V DC)

I/O extension module - RAD-DI8-IFS - 2901539

Radioline - I/O extension module, 8 digital inputs (0 ... 30.5 V DC) or 2 pulse inputs up to 100 Hz

09/15/2017 Page 15 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2901540

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Accessories

I/O extension module - RAD-DO8-IFS - 2902811

Radioline - I/O extension module, 8 digital transistor outputs (30.5 V DC/200 mA)

I/O extension module - RAD-AI4-IFS - 2901537

Radioline - I/O extension module, 4 analog current inputs (0/4 mA ... 20 mA)

I/O extension module - RAD-AO4-IFS - 2901538

Radioline - I/O extension module, 4 analog current or voltage outputs (0/4 mA ... 20 mA, 0 V ... 10 V)

I/O extension module - RAD-PT100-4-IFS - 2904035

Radioline - I/O extension module, 4 Pt 100 inputs (-50°C ... +250°C / -58 °F ... 482 °F)

Phoenix Contact 2017 © - all rights reserved http://www.phoenixcontact.com

09/15/2017 Page 16 / 16 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2903447

Cable for programming - RAD-CABLE-USB - 2903447 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)

Radioline - USB data cable for communication between the PC and Radioline devices, energy supply for diagnostics and configuration via the USB port of the PC, cable length: 2 m / 6.5 ft

Why buy this product

Power supply for diagnostics and configuration via the USB port of the PC

Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 STK

GTIN

GTIN 4046356739429 Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 80.000 g Custom tariff number 85444290 Country of origin Germany

Technical data

Dimensions Fixed cable length 2 m Ambient conditions Ambient temperature (operation) -25 °C ... 70 °C (-13 °F ... 158 °F) Ambient temperature (storage/transport) -40 °C ... 85 °C (-40 °F ... 185 °F) General Connection 1 PC side IFS (male) Connection method USB 2.0 Fullspeed

09/15/2017 Page 1 / 4 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2903447

Cable for programming - RAD-CABLE-USB - 2903447

Technical data

General Note serial Connection 2 Device side USB type A (male) Connection method IFS data port Standards and Regulations Electromagnetic compatibility Conformance with EMC Directive 2014/30/EU Noise emission EN 61000-6-4 Noise immunity EN 61000-6-2 Environmental Product Compliance China RoHS Environmentally friendly use period: unlimited = EFUP-e No hazardous substances above threshold values

Drawings

Schematic diagram

1.1 1.2 1.3

2.1 2.2 2.3

+24V RSSI+ RSSI- 0V

ANT

S.PORT

PWR

DAT 8 8 ERR

RAD-ID

SET

RX TX

D(A) D(B) RX TX GND COM 1 NO 1 NC 1

Example application

Classifications eCl@ss

eCl@ss 4.0 27230207 eCl@ss 4.1 27250312 eCl@ss 5.0 27242208 eCl@ss 5.1 27242208 eCl@ss 6.0 27242208 09/15/2017 Page 2 / 4 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2903447

Cable for programming - RAD-CABLE-USB - 2903447

Classifications eCl@ss eCl@ss 7.0 27242208 eCl@ss 8.0 19059205 eCl@ss 9.0 19059205 ETIM

ETIM 3.0 EC001423 ETIM 4.0 EC001408 ETIM 5.0 EC001408 ETIM 6.0 EC001408 UNSPSC

UNSPSC 6.01 30211506 UNSPSC 7.0901 43223108 UNSPSC 11 39121008 UNSPSC 12.01 43223108 UNSPSC 13.2 43223108 Approvals

Approvals

Approvals

EAC

Ex Approvals

Approval details

EAC  EAC-Zulassung Accessories

Accessories Communication module

09/15/2017 Page 3 / 4 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2903447

Cable for programming - RAD-CABLE-USB - 2903447

Accessories

Communication module - RAD-RS485-IFS - 2702184

Radioline - RS-485 multipoint multiplexer, can be extended with I/O modules, can be used as Modbus/RTU bus coupler or can be combined with Radioline wireless system, up to 99 stations, range of up to 1.2 km on in-house copper cables

Trusted Wireless device

Wireless module - RAD-2400-IFS - 2901541

Radioline - 2.4 GHz wireless transceiver with RS-232/RS-485 interface, can be extended with I/O modules, RSMA (female) antenna connection, point-to-point, star, and mesh networks up to 250 stations, range of up to 5 km (with a clear line of sight), for worldwide use

Wireless module - RAD-900-IFS - 2901540

Radioline - 900 MHz wireless transceiver with RS-232/485 interface, can be extended with I/O modules, RSMA (female) antenna connection, point-to-point, star, and mesh networks up to 250 stations, range of up to 32 km (line of sight), use in North America

Wireless module - RAD-868-IFS - 2904909

Radioline - 868 MHz wireless transceiver with RS-232/RS-485 interface, can be extended with I/O modules, RSMA (female) antenna connection, point-to-point, star, and mesh networks up to 99 stations, range of up to 20 km (with a clear line of sight), for use in Europe

Phoenix Contact 2017 © - all rights reserved http://www.phoenixcontact.com

09/15/2017 Page 4 / 4 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2867801

Antenna - RAD-ISM-900-ANT-YAGI-3-N - 2867801 Please be informed that the data shown in this PDF Document is generated from our Online Catalog. Please find the complete data in the user's documentation. Our General Terms of Use for Downloads are valid (http://phoenixcontact.com/download)

Directional antenna, 868 MHz / 900 MHz, gain: 5 dBi, polarization: linear, opening angle: h/v 168°/78°, degree of protection: IP65, connection: N (female), incl. mounting bracket and mast clips

Why buy this product

For large distances For stationary or linear mobile applications For point-to-point connections

Key Commercial Data

Packing unit 1 STK Weight per Piece (excluding packing) 1,150.000 g Custom tariff number 85177019 Country of origin United States

Technical data

Dimensions Width 6 cm Height 17 cm Fixed cable length 0.60 m Ambient conditions Degree of protection IP65 Ambient temperature (operation) -40 °C ... 80 °C General With connecting cable yes Frequency range 900 MHz 900 MHz 09/15/2017 Page 1 / 3 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2867801

Antenna - RAD-ISM-900-ANT-YAGI-3-N - 2867801

Technical data

General Horizontal beamwidth 168 ° Vertical beamwidth 78 ° Polarization Linear vertical or horizontal Impedance 50 Ω Gain 5 dBi Wind velocity 200 km/h Connection method N (female) with cable (0.6 m) Fixed cable length 0.60 m Material Aluminum (Antenna housing) V2A (Bracket) V2A (U-shaped screw) Mounting type Mast mounting External diameter 32 mm ... 60 mm (Mast)

Drawings

Schematic diagram Schematic diagram

Mast mounting

Classifications eCl@ss

eCl@ss 4.0 27250312 eCl@ss 4.1 27250312 eCl@ss 5.0 19070102

09/15/2017 Page 2 / 3 https://www.phoenixcontact.com/us/products/2867801

Antenna - RAD-ISM-900-ANT-YAGI-3-N - 2867801

Classifications eCl@ss eCl@ss 5.1 19070102 eCl@ss 6.0 19070102 eCl@ss 7.0 19070102 eCl@ss 8.0 19070105 eCl@ss 9.0 19070105 ETIM

ETIM 2.0 EC000416 ETIM 3.0 EC001698 ETIM 4.0 EC001698 ETIM 5.0 EC001698 ETIM 6.0 EC001698 UNSPSC

UNSPSC 6.01 43171611 UNSPSC 7.0901 43221706 UNSPSC 11 43171611 UNSPSC 12.01 43221706 UNSPSC 13.2 43221715

Phoenix Contact 2017 © - all rights reserved http://www.phoenixcontact.com

09/15/2017 Page 3 / 3